Skip to main content

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-27

Document Type Active Internet-Draft (emailcore WG)
Author Dr. John C. Klensin
Last updated 2024-02-26
Replaces draft-klensin-rfc5321bis
RFC stream Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)
Intended RFC status Internet Standard
Formats
Additional resources Mailing list discussion
Stream WG state Waiting for WG Chair Go-Ahead
Revised I-D Needed - Issue raised by WGLC
Document shepherd (None)
IESG IESG state I-D Exists
Consensus boilerplate Yes
Telechat date (None)
Responsible AD (None)
Send notices to (None)
draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-27
EMAILCORE                                                     J. Klensin
Internet-Draft                                          26 February 2024
Obsoletes: 5321, 1846, 7504, 7505 (if approved)                         
Intended status: Standards Track                                        
Expires: 29 August 2024

                     Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
                   draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-27

Abstract

   This document is a specification of the basic protocol for Internet
   electronic mail transport.  It (including text carried forward from
   RFC 5321) consolidates, updates, and clarifies several previous
   documents, making all or parts of most of them obsolete.  It covers
   the SMTP extension mechanisms and best practices for the contemporary
   Internet, but does not provide details about particular extensions.
   The document also provides information about use of SMTP for other
   than strict mail transport and delivery.  This document replaces RFC
   5321, the earlier version with the same title, and supersedes RFCs
   1846, 7504, and 7505, incorporating all the relevant information in
   them.

Notes on Reading This Working Draft

   // RFC Editor: Please remove this note.

   Early versions of this working draft were extensively annotated with
   information, primarily about changes made over the decade since RFC
   5321 appeared, especially when those changes might be controversial
   or should get careful review.  Most of those annotations and
   associated questions are marked in CREF comments ("//" in the text
   form).  Starting with version -09 of the draft, annotations and notes
   that were no longer relevant are being pruned to improve readability.
   In general, any annotations or comments not marked with "[[Note in
   Draft", in the contents of an "Editor's note", or in the "Errata
   Summary" appendix (Appendix I.1, are just notes on changes that have
   already been made and where those changes originated.  Completed
   changes are described in Appendix H.  Those that are still in
   progress or awaiting WG review are listed in Appendix G (and not
   identified in their title lines as "closed").  As one can tell from
   the dates (when they are given), this document has been periodically
   updated over a very long period of time.

   As people review or try to use this document, it may be worth paying
   special attention to the historical discussion in Section 1.2.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                 [Page 1]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   This evolving draft should be discussed on the emailcore@ietf.org
   list.

Status of This Memo

   This Internet-Draft is submitted in full conformance with the
   provisions of BCP 78 and BCP 79.

   Internet-Drafts are working documents of the Internet Engineering
   Task Force (IETF).  Note that other groups may also distribute
   working documents as Internet-Drafts.  The list of current Internet-
   Drafts is at https://datatracker.ietf.org/drafts/current/.

   Internet-Drafts are draft documents valid for a maximum of six months
   and may be updated, replaced, or obsoleted by other documents at any
   time.  It is inappropriate to use Internet-Drafts as reference
   material or to cite them other than as "work in progress."

   This Internet-Draft will expire on 29 August 2024.

Copyright Notice

   Copyright (c) 2024 IETF Trust and the persons identified as the
   document authors.  All rights reserved.

   This document is subject to BCP 78 and the IETF Trust's Legal
   Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (https://trustee.ietf.org/
   license-info) in effect on the date of publication of this document.
   Please review these documents carefully, as they describe your rights
   and restrictions with respect to this document.  Code Components
   extracted from this document must include Revised BSD License text as
   described in Section 4.e of the Trust Legal Provisions and are
   provided without warranty as described in the Revised BSD License.

Table of Contents

   1.  Introduction  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  10
     1.1.  Transport of Electronic Mail  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  10
     1.2.  History and Context for This Document . . . . . . . . . .  11
     1.3.  Document Conventions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  12
   2.  The SMTP Model  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  12
     2.1.  Basic Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  12
     2.2.  The Extension Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  15
       2.2.1.  Background  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  15
       2.2.2.  Definition and Registration of Extensions . . . . . .  16
       2.2.3.  Special Issues with Extensions  . . . . . . . . . . .  17
     2.3.  SMTP Terminology  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  17
       2.3.1.  Mail Objects  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  17

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                 [Page 2]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

       2.3.2.  Senders and Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  18
       2.3.3.  Mail Agents and Message Stores  . . . . . . . . . . .  18
       2.3.4.  Host  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  19
       2.3.5.  Domain Names  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  19
       2.3.6.  Buffer and State Table  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  20
       2.3.7.  Commands and Replies  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  20
       2.3.8.  Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  20
       2.3.9.  Message Content and Mail Data . . . . . . . . . . . .  21
       2.3.10. Originator, Delivery, Relay, and Gateway Systems  . .  21
       2.3.11. Mailbox and Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  22
       2.3.12. Sessions and Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  22
     2.4.  General Syntax Principles and Transaction Model . . . . .  22
   3.  The SMTP Procedures: An Overview  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  25
     3.1.  Session Initiation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  25
     3.2.  Client Initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  25
     3.3.  Mail Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  26
     3.4.  Address Modification and Expansion  . . . . . . . . . . .  29
       3.4.1.  Forwarding for Address Correction or Updating . . . .  29
       3.4.2.  Aliases and Mailing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  30
         3.4.2.1.  Simple Aliases  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  30
         3.4.2.2.  Mailing Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  30
     3.5.  Commands for Debugging Addresses  . . . . . . . . . . . .  31
       3.5.1.  Overview  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  31
       3.5.2.  VRFY Normal Response  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  33
       3.5.3.  Meaning of VRFY or EXPN Success Response  . . . . . .  34
       3.5.4.  Semantics and Applications of EXPN  . . . . . . . . .  34
     3.6.  Relaying and Mail Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  34
       3.6.1.  Mail eXchange Records and Relaying  . . . . . . . . .  35
       3.6.2.  Message Submission Servers as Relays  . . . . . . . .  36
     3.7.  Mail Gatewaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  36
       3.7.1.  Header Fields in Gatewaying . . . . . . . . . . . . .  36
       3.7.2.  Received Lines in Gatewaying  . . . . . . . . . . . .  37
       3.7.3.  Addresses in Gatewaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  37
       3.7.4.  Other Header Fields in Gatewaying . . . . . . . . . .  38
       3.7.5.  Envelopes in Gatewaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  38
     3.8.  Terminating Sessions and Connections  . . . . . . . . . .  38
   4.  The SMTP Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  39
     4.1.  SMTP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  39
       4.1.1.  Command Semantics and Syntax  . . . . . . . . . . . .  39
         4.1.1.1.  Extended HELLO (EHLO) or HELLO (HELO) . . . . . .  40
         4.1.1.2.  MAIL (MAIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  42
         4.1.1.3.  RECIPIENT (RCPT)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  42
         4.1.1.4.  DATA (DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  44
         4.1.1.5.  RESET (RSET)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  45
         4.1.1.6.  VERIFY (VRFY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  46
         4.1.1.7.  EXPAND (EXPN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  46
         4.1.1.8.  HELP (HELP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  46
         4.1.1.9.  NOOP (NOOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  47

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                 [Page 3]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

         4.1.1.10. QUIT (QUIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  47
       4.1.2.  Command Argument Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  48
       4.1.3.  Address Literals  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  50
       4.1.4.  Order of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  51
     4.2.  SMTP Replies  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  53
       4.2.1.  Reply Code Severities and Theory  . . . . . . . . . .  55
       4.2.2.  Reply Codes by Function Groups  . . . . . . . . . . .  57
       4.2.3.  Reply Codes in Numeric Order  . . . . . . . . . . . .  59
       4.2.4.  Some specific code situations and relationships . . .  60
         4.2.4.1.  Reply Code 502  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  61
         4.2.4.2.  "No mail accepted" situations and the 521, 554,
                 556, and 450 codes  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  61
         4.2.4.3.  Reply Codes after DATA and the Subsequent
                 <CRLF>.<CRLF> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  62
     4.3.  Sequencing of Commands and Replies  . . . . . . . . . . .  63
       4.3.1.  Sequencing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  63
       4.3.2.  Command-Reply Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  64
     4.4.  Trace Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  66
       4.4.1.  Received Header Field (Time Stamp)  . . . . . . . . .  66
       4.4.2.  Return-path Header Field  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  67
       4.4.3.  Return-path, Non-SMTP Systems, and Gateways . . . . .  68
       4.4.4.  Additional Trace Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  68
       4.4.5.  Trace Information Summary and Analysis  . . . . . . .  68
     4.5.  Additional Implementation Issues  . . . . . . . . . . . .  70
       4.5.1.  Minimum Implementation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  70
       4.5.2.  Transparency  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  71
       4.5.3.  Sizes and Timeouts  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  71
         4.5.3.1.  Size Limits and Minimums  . . . . . . . . . . . .  71
           4.5.3.1.1.  Local-part  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  72
           4.5.3.1.2.  Domain  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  72
           4.5.3.1.3.  Path  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  72
           4.5.3.1.4.  Command Line  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  72
           4.5.3.1.5.  Reply Line  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  72
           4.5.3.1.6.  Text Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  72
           4.5.3.1.7.  Message Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  72
           4.5.3.1.8.  Recipient Buffer  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  73
           4.5.3.1.9.  Treatment When Limits Exceeded  . . . . . . .  73
           4.5.3.1.10. Too Many Recipients Code  . . . . . . . . . .  73
         4.5.3.2.  Timeouts  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  74
           4.5.3.2.1.  Initial 220 Message: 5 Minutes  . . . . . . .  74
           4.5.3.2.2.  MAIL Command: 5 Minutes . . . . . . . . . . .  74
           4.5.3.2.3.  RCPT Command: 5 Minutes . . . . . . . . . . .  75
           4.5.3.2.4.  DATA Initiation: 2 Minutes  . . . . . . . . .  75
           4.5.3.2.5.  Data Block: 3 Minutes . . . . . . . . . . . .  75
           4.5.3.2.6.  DATA Termination: 10 Minutes. . . . . . . . .  75
           4.5.3.2.7.  Server Timeout: 5 Minutes.  . . . . . . . . .  75
       4.5.4.  Retry Strategies  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  75
       4.5.5.  Messages with a Null Reverse-Path . . . . . . . . . .  77

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                 [Page 4]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   5.  Address Resolution and Mail Handling  . . . . . . . . . . . .  78
     5.1.  Locating the Target Host  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  78
     5.2.  IPv6 and MX Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  81
   6.  Problem Detection and Handling  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  81
     6.1.  Reliable Delivery and Replies by Email  . . . . . . . . .  81
     6.2.  Unwanted, Unsolicited, and "Attack" Messages  . . . . . .  82
     6.3.  Loop Detection  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  83
     6.4.  Compensating for Irregularities . . . . . . . . . . . . .  83
   7.  Security Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  84
     7.1.  Mail Security and Spoofing  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  85
     7.2.  Hiding Addresses from Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  86
     7.3.  VRFY, EXPN, and Security  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  86
     7.4.  Mail Rerouting Based on the 251 and 551 Response Codes  .  87
     7.5.  Information Disclosure in Announcements . . . . . . . . .  87
     7.6.  Information Disclosure in Trace Fields  . . . . . . . . .  87
     7.7.  Information Disclosure in Message Forwarding  . . . . . .  88
     7.8.  Local Operational Requirements and Resistance to
           Attacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  88
     7.9.  Scope of Operation of SMTP Servers  . . . . . . . . . . .  88
   8.  IANA Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  89
     8.1.  SMTP-related Registries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  89
       8.1.1.  Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) Service
               Extensions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  89
         8.1.1.1.  Registration Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  89
         8.1.1.2.  Registry Information  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  91
       8.1.2.  Address Literal Tags  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  92
       8.1.3.  Mail Transmission Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  92
       8.1.4.  Additional Registered Clauses . . . . . . . . . . . .  92
     8.2.  New Registry Actions with <<This Document>> . . . . . . .  92
     8.3.  Specification of Registry Group and Registry Structure  .  93
   9.  Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  94
   10. References  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  95
     10.1.  Normative References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  95
     10.2.  Informative References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  98
   Appendix A.  TCP Transport Service  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
   Appendix B.  Generating SMTP Commands from Internet Message Format
           Header Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
   Appendix C.  Placeholder (formerly Source Routes) . . . . . . . . 105
   Appendix D.  Scenarios  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
     D.1.  A Typical SMTP Transaction Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . 105
     D.2.  Aborted SMTP Transaction Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
     D.3.  Relayed Mail Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
     D.4.  Verifying and Sending Scenario  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
   Appendix E.  Other Gateway Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
   Appendix F.  Deprecated Features of RFC 821 . . . . . . . . . . . 109
     F.1.  TURN  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
     F.2.  Source Routing  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
     F.3.  HELO  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                 [Page 5]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

     F.4.  #-literals  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
     F.5.  Dates and Years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
     F.6.  Sending versus Mailing  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
   Appendix G.  Other Outstanding Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
     G.1.  IP Address literals (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
     G.2.  Repeated Use of EHLO (closed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
     G.3.  Meaning of "MTA" and Related Terminology (closed) . . . . 113
     G.4.  Originator, or Originating System, Authentication
            (closed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
     G.5.  Remove or deprecate the work-around from code 552 to 452
            (closed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
     G.6.  Clarify where the protocol stands with respect to
            submission and TLS issues (Closed) . . . . . . . . . . . 113
     G.7.  Probably-substantive Discussion Topics Identified in Other
            Ways (closed or OBE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
       G.7.1.  Issues with 521, 554, and 556 codes (closed)  . . . . 114
       G.7.2.  SMTP Model, terminology, and relationship to RFC 5598
               (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
       G.7.3.  Resolvable FQDNs and private domain names (closed)  . 114
       G.7.4.  Possible clarification about mail transactions and
               transaction state (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
       G.7.5.  Issues with mailing lists, aliases, and forwarding
               (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
       G.7.6.  Requirements for domain name and/or IP address in EHLO
               (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
       G.7.7.  Does the 'first digit only' and/or non-listed reply (c
               code text need clarification)? (closed) . . . . . . . 114
       G.7.8.  Size limits (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
       G.7.9.  Discussion of 'blind' copies and RCPT (closed)  . . . 115
       G.7.10. Further clarifications needed to source routes?
               (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
       G.7.11. Should 1yz Be Revisited? (closed) . . . . . . . . . . 115
       G.7.12. Review Timeout Specifications (closed)  . . . . . . . 115
       G.7.13. Possible SEND, SAML, SOML Loose End (closed)  . . . . 115
       G.7.14. Abstract Update (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
       G.7.15. Informative References to MIME and/or Message
               Submission (closed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
       G.7.16. Mail Transaction Discussion (closed)  . . . . . . . . 115
       G.7.17. Hop by hop Authentication and/or Encryption
               (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
       G.7.18. More Text About 554 Given 521, etc. (closed)  . . . . 115
       G.7.19. Minimum Lengths and Quantities (closed) . . . . . . . 115
     G.8.  Enhanced Reply Codes and DSNs (closed)  . . . . . . . . . 116
     G.9.  Revisiting Quoted Strings (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . 116
     G.10. Internationalization (closed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
     G.11. SMTP Clients, Servers, Senders, and Receivers (closed)  . 116
     G.12. Extension Keywords Starting in 'X-' (closed)  . . . . . . 116
     G.13. Deprecating HELO (closed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                 [Page 6]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

     G.14. The FOR Clause in Trace Fields: Semantics, Security
            Considerations, and Other Issues (closed)  . . . . . . . 116
     G.15. Resistance to Attacks and Operational Necessity
            (closed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
     G.16. Mandatory 8BITMIME (closed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
     G.17. New tickets created between 2022-01-21 and 2022-03-01
            (closed (all of them)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
     G.18. Approval Required to Register an SMTP Service Extension
            with IANA (closed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
     G.19. Inconsistencies between rfc5321bis and IANA registry and
            related issues (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
     G.20. Side-effects of approval change for Service Extension from
            "Standards Track or IESG Approved Experimental" to
            "Specification Required" (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . 118
     G.21. Appendix B and Message Submission (closed)  . . . . . . . 118
     G.22. IANA Registration Model for Registries Other Than Service
            Extensions (Closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
     G.23. Headers Inserted in Mail Transport (closed) . . . . . . . 118
     G.24. Describing the "Operational Requirements" Loopholes
            (tentatively closed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
     G.25. Relocate paragraphs after the first out of Section 3.6.2
            and to 3.6.1 (tentatively closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . 118
     G.26. Remove SHOULD requirement for use of reply text . . . . . 118
     G.27. Section 4.2.4.3 appears to impose a BCP 14 requirement on
            users  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
     G.28. Misplaced paragraph about special treatment in
            Section 4.4.3  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
   Appendix H.  Completed Items Moved from Appendix G  . . . . . . . 119
     H.1.  IP Address literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
     H.2.  Repeated Use of EHLO  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
     H.3.  Meaning of "MTA" and Related Terminology  . . . . . . . . 120
     H.4.  Originator, or Originating System, Authentication (to A/
            S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
     H.5.  Possible clarification about mail transactions and
            transaction state  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
     H.6.  Remove or deprecate the work-around from code 552 to
            452  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
     H.7.  Resolvable FQDNs and private domain names . . . . . . . . 121
     H.8.  Issues with 521, 554, and 556 codes . . . . . . . . . . . 121
     H.9.  Requirements for domain name and/or IP address in EHLO
            (mostly closed, some to A/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
     H.10. Does the 'first digit only' and/or non-listed reply code
            text need clarification? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
     H.11. Size limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
     H.12. Further clarifications needed to source routes? . . . . . 122
     H.13. Should 1yz Be Revisited?  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
     H.14. Review Timeout Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
     H.15. Possible SEND, SAML, SOML Loose End . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                 [Page 7]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

     H.16. Abstract Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
     H.17. Informative References to MIME and/or Message
            Submission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
     H.18. Hop by hop Authentication and/or Encryption . . . . . . . 123
     H.19. Enhanced Reply Codes and DSNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
     H.20. SMTP Clients, Servers, Senders, and Receivers . . . . . . 124
     H.21. Extension Keywords Starting in 'X-' . . . . . . . . . . . 124
     H.22. Deprecating HELO  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
     H.23. Resistance to Attacks and Operational Necessity . . . . . 125
     H.24. New tickets created between 2022-01-21 and 2022-03-01 and
            subsequently closed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
     H.25. Mandatory 8BITMIME  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
     H.26. Discussion of 'blind' copies and RCPT . . . . . . . . . . 126
     H.27. Revisiting Quoted Strings (reclassified)  . . . . . . . . 126
     H.28. Clarify where the protocol stands with respect to
            submission and TLS issues (reclassified) . . . . . . . . 126
     H.29. SMTP Model, terminology, and relationship to RFC 5598 . . 127
     H.30. More Text About 554 Given 521, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . 127
     H.31. Minimum Lengths and Quantities  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
     H.32. Internationalization  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
     H.33. Inconsistencies between rfc5321bis and IANA registry and
            related issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
     H.34. Approval Required to Register an SMTP Service Extension
            with IANA  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
     H.35. Side-effects of approval change for Service Extension from
            "Standards Track or IESG Approved Experimental" to
            "Specification Required" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
     H.36. Issues with mailing lists, aliases, and forwarding  . . . 129
     H.37. IANA Registration Model for Registries Other Than Service
            Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
     H.38. Appendix B and Message Submission . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
     H.39. The FOR Clause in Trace Fields: Semantics, Security
            Considerations, and Other Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
     H.40. Headers Inserted in Mail Transport  . . . . . . . . . . . 131
     H.41. Describing the "Operational Requirements" Loopholes . . . 132
     H.42. Relocate paragraphs after the first out of Section 3.6.2
            and to 3.6.1 (closed)  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
   Appendix I.  Detailed Change Descriptions and Logs  . . . . . . . 132
     I.1.  RFC 5321 Errata Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
     I.2.  Changes from RFC 5321 (published October 2008) to the
           initial (-00) version of this draft . . . . . . . . . . . 134
     I.3.  Changes Among Versions of rfc5321bis  . . . . . . . . . . 135
       I.3.1.  Changes from draft-klensin-rfc5321bis-00 (posted
               2012-12-02) to -01  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
       I.3.2.  Changes from draft-klensin-rfc5321bis-01 (20191203) to
               -02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
       I.3.3.  Changes from draft-klensin-rfc5321bis-02 (2019-12-27)
               to -03  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                 [Page 8]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

       I.3.4.  Changes from draft-klensin-rfc5321bis-03 (2020-07-02)
               to draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-00 . . . . . . . . 136
       I.3.5.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-00
               (2020-10-06) to -01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
       I.3.6.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-01
               (2020-12-25) to -02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
       I.3.7.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-02
               (2021-02-21) to -03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
       I.3.8.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-03
               (2021-07-10) to -04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
       I.3.9.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-04
               (2021-10-03) to -05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
       I.3.10. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-05
               (2021-10-24) to -06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
       I.3.11. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-06
               (2021-11-07) to -07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
       I.3.12. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-07
               (2021-12-04) to -08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
       I.3.13. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-08
               (2021-12-31) to -09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
       I.3.14. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-09
               (2022-02-01 to -10  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
       I.3.15. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-10
               (2022-03-07) to -11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
       I.3.16. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-11
               (2022-05-24) to -12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
       I.3.17. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-12
               (2022-07-09) to -13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
       I.3.18. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-13
               (2022-09-13) to -14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
       I.3.19. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-14
               (2022-10-23) to -15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
       I.3.20. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-15
               (2022-11-06) to -16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
       I.3.21. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-16
               (2022-12-06) to -17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
       I.3.22. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-17
               (2022-12-31) to -18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
       I.3.23. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-18
               (2023-02-07) to -19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
       I.3.24. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-19
               (2023-07-23) to -20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
       I.3.25. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-20
               (2023-11-16) to -21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
       I.3.26. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-21
               (2023-11-27) to -22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
       I.3.27. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-22
               (2023-12-05) to -23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                 [Page 9]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

       I.3.28. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-23
               (2023-12-10) to -24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
       I.3.29. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-24
               (2024-01-11) to -25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
       I.3.30. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-25
               (2024-01-24) to -26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
       I.3.31. Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-26
               (2024-02-09) to -27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
     I.4.  Summary of changes from RFC 5321 (published in October
           2008) to <<This Document>>  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
   Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
   Author's Address  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

1.  Introduction

1.1.  Transport of Electronic Mail

   The objective of the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to
   transfer mail reliably and efficiently.

   SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and
   requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel.  While this
   document specifically discusses transport over TCP, other transports
   are possible.  Appendices to RFC 821 [6] describe some of them.

   An important feature of SMTP is its capability to transport mail
   across multiple networks, usually referred to as "SMTP mail relaying"
   (see Section 3.6).  A network consists of the mutually-TCP-accessible
   hosts on the public Internet, the mutually-TCP-accessible hosts on a
   firewall-isolated TCP/IP Intranet [37] or hosts in some other LAN or
   WAN environment utilizing a non-TCP transport-level protocol.  Using
   SMTP, a process can transfer mail to another process on the same
   network or to some other network via a relay or gateway process
   accessible to both networks.

   In this way, a mail message may pass through a number of intermediate
   relay or gateway hosts on its path from sender to ultimate recipient.
   The Mail eXchanger mechanisms of the domain name system (RFC 1035
   [7], RFC 974 [20], and Section 5 of this document) are used to
   identify the appropriate next-hop destination for a message being
   transported.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 10]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

1.2.  History and Context for This Document

   This Internet Standard specification contains material, in many cases
   including copied exact text, from several documents including some
   dating back to RFC 821 [6], published over forty years ago.  While
   most of the early features are unchanged, others have been updated or
   enhanced.  This section summarizes the relationship of the present
   specification to earlier ones leading up to the very similar RFC 5321
   [54] of October 2008.  Changes between RFC 5321 and <<This Document>>
   appear in Appendix I.4.  This document provides the specification of
   the basic protocol for Internet electronic mail transport.  It
   consolidates, updates and clarifies, but does not add new or change
   existing functionality of the following:

   *  the original SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) specification of
      RFC 821 [6],

   *  domain name system requirements and implications for mail
      transport from RFC 1035 [7] and RFC 974 [20],

   *  the clarifications and applicability statements in RFC 1123 [10],

   *  the new error codes added by RFC 1846 [25] and later by RFC 7504
      [52], obsoleting both of those documents, and

   *  material drawn from the SMTP Extension mechanisms in RFC 1869
      [27].

   It also includes editorial, clarification, and correction changes
   that were made to RFC 2821 [35] to bring that specification to Draft
   Standard and similar changes to RFC 5321 [54] to bring the current
   document to Internet Standard as well as changes to the description
   and specification of IANA registries to align with contemporary
   practice and thinking.

   It may help the reader to understand that, to reduce the risk of
   introducing errors, large parts of the document essentially merge the
   earlier specifications listed in the bullet points above rather than
   providing a completely rewritten, reorganized, and integrated
   description of SMTP.  That strategy and the consequent document
   organization, had IETF consensus at the time RFC 2821 was written.
   An index and additional cross-references are provided to assist in
   the quest for information.

   It obsoletes RFCs 5321 [54] (the earlier version of this
   specification), 1846 [25] and incorporates the substance of 7504 [52]
   (specification of reply codes), and 7505 [53] (the "Null MX"
   specification).  Although SMTP was designed as a mail transport and

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 11]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   delivery protocol, this specification also contains information that
   is relevant to its optional use for submission of mail by users and
   to some aspects of the Post Office Protocol (POP) (RFC 937 [18], RFC
   1939 [28]) and IMAP (RFC 9051 [41]) protocols.  In general, the
   separate mail submission protocol specified in RFC 6409 [48] is now
   preferred to direct use of SMTP for that function; more discussion of
   that subject appears in that document.

   Section 2.3 provides definitions of terms specific to this document.
   Except when the historical terminology is necessary for clarity, this
   document uses the current 'client' and 'server' terminology to
   identify the sending and receiving SMTP processes, respectively.  In
   general, "sender-SMTP" and "SMTP client" are equivalent as are
   "receiver-SMTP" and "SMTP server".

   A companion document, rfc5322bis [16], discusses message header
   sections and bodies and specifies formats and structures for them.
   Other relevant documents and their relationships are discussed in a
   forthcoming Applicability Statement [55].

1.3.  Document Conventions

   The key words "MUST", "MUST NOT", "REQUIRED", "SHALL", "SHALL NOT",
   "SHOULD", "SHOULD NOT", "RECOMMENDED", "MAY", and "OPTIONAL" in this
   document are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119 [1] and RFC
   8174 [2].  As each of these terms was intentionally and carefully
   chosen to improve the interoperability of email, each use of these
   terms is to be treated as a conformance requirement.

   This document has a long history.  To avoid the risk of various
   errors and of confusing readers and documents that point to this one,
   most examples and the domain names they contain are preserved from
   RFC 2821.  Readers are cautioned that these are illustrative examples
   that should not actually be used in either code or configuration
   files.

2.  The SMTP Model

2.1.  Basic Structure

   The SMTP design can be pictured as:

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 12]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

                   +----------+            +----------+
      +------+     |          |            |          |    +------+
      | User |<--> |          |   SMTP     |          |<-->| File |
      +------+     |  Client- |Commands/   | Server-  |    |System|
      +------+     |   SMTP   |  Replies   |    SMTP  |    +------+
      | File |<--> |          |<---------->|          | or
      |System|     |          |  and Mail  |          |    +------+
      +------+     |          |            |          |    |Next- |
                   |          |            |          |    |   hop|
      +-------+    |          |            |          |<-->|SMTP  |
      |Submis-|<-->|          |            |          |    |client|
      |   sion|    +----------+            +----------+    +------+
      |System |
      +-------+     SMTP client            SMTP server
                     (sender)               (receiver)

   When an SMTP client has a message to transmit, it establishes a two-
   way transmission channel to an SMTP server.  The responsibility of an
   SMTP client is to transfer mail messages to one or more SMTP servers,
   or report its failure to do so.

   The means by which a mail message is presented to an SMTP client
   (i.e., between the first two columns above), and how that client
   determines the identifier(s) ("names") of the domain(s) to which mail
   messages are to be transferred, are local matters.  They are not
   addressed by this document.  In some cases, the designated domain(s),
   or those determined by an SMTP client, will identify the final
   destination(s) of the mail message.  In other cases, common with SMTP
   clients associated with implementations of the POP (RFC 937 [18], RFC
   1939 [28]) or IMAP (RFC 9051 [41]) protocols, or when the SMTP client
   is inside an isolated transport service environment, the domain
   determined will identify an intermediate destination through which
   all mail messages are to be relayed.  SMTP clients that transfer all
   traffic regardless of the target domains associated with the
   individual messages, or that do not maintain queues for retrying
   message transmissions that initially cannot be completed, may
   otherwise conform to this specification but are not considered fully-
   capable.  Fully-capable SMTP implementations, including the relays
   used by these less capable ones, and their destinations, are expected
   to support all of the queuing, retrying, and alternate address
   functions discussed in this specification.  In many situations and
   configurations, the less-capable clients discussed above SHOULD be
   using the message submission protocol (RFC 6409 [48]) rather than
   SMTP.

   The means by which an SMTP client, once it has determined a target
   domain, determines the identity of an SMTP server to which a copy of
   a message is to be transferred, and then performs that transfer, are

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 13]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   covered by this document.  To effect a mail transfer to an SMTP
   server, an SMTP client establishes a two-way transmission channel to
   that SMTP server.  An SMTP client determines the address of an
   appropriate host running an SMTP server by resolving a destination
   domain name to either an intermediate Mail eXchanger host or a final
   target host.

   An SMTP server may be either the ultimate destination or an
   intermediate "relay" (that is, it may assume the role of an SMTP
   client after receiving the message) or "gateway" (that is, it may
   transport the message further using some protocol other than SMTP).
   SMTP commands are generated by the SMTP client and sent to the SMTP
   server.  SMTP replies are sent from the SMTP server to the SMTP
   client in response to the commands.

   In other words, message transfer can occur in a single connection
   between the original SMTP-sender and the final SMTP-recipient, or can
   occur in a series of hops through intermediary systems.  In either
   case, once the server has issued a success response at the end of the
   mail data, a formal handoff of responsibility for the message occurs:
   the protocol requires that a server MUST accept responsibility for
   either delivering the message or properly reporting the failure to do
   so (see Sections 6.1, 6.2, and 7.8, below).

   Once the transmission channel is established and initial handshaking
   is completed, the SMTP client normally initiates a mail transaction.
   Such a transaction consists of a series of commands to specify the
   originator and destination of the mail and transmission of the
   message content (including any lines in the header section or other
   structure) itself.  When the same message is sent to multiple
   recipients, this protocol encourages the transmission of only one
   copy of the data for all recipients at the same destination (or
   intermediate relay) host.

   The server responds to each command with a reply; replies may
   indicate that the command was accepted, that additional commands are
   expected, or that a temporary or permanent error condition exists.
   Commands specifying the sender or recipients may include server-
   permitted SMTP service extension requests, as discussed in
   Section 2.2.  The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time,
   although this can be modified by mutually agreed upon extension
   requests such as command pipelining (RFC 2920 [36]).

   Once a given mail message has been transmitted, the client may either
   request that the connection be shut down or may initiate other mail
   transactions.  In addition, an SMTP client may use a connection to an
   SMTP server for ancillary services such as verification of email
   addresses or retrieval of mailing list subscriber addresses.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 14]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   As suggested above, this protocol provides mechanisms for the
   transmission of mail.  Historically, this transmission normally
   occurred directly from the sending user's host to the receiving
   user's host when the two hosts are connected to the same transport
   service.  When they are not connected to the same transport service
   or other circumstances dictate, transmission occurs via one or more
   relay SMTP servers.  A very common case in the Internet today
   involves submission of the original message to an intermediate,
   "message submission" server, which is similar to a relay but has some
   additional properties; such servers are discussed in Section 2.3.10
   and at some length in RFC 6409 [48].  An intermediate host that acts
   as either an SMTP relay or as a gateway into some other transmission
   environment is usually selected through the use of the domain name
   service (DNS) Mail eXchanger mechanism.

2.2.  The Extension Model

2.2.1.  Background

   In an effort that started in 1990, approximately a decade after RFC
   821 was completed, the protocol was modified with a "service
   extensions" model that permits the client and server to agree to
   utilize shared functionality beyond the original SMTP requirements
   [24].  The SMTP extension mechanism defines a means whereby an
   extended SMTP client and server may recognize each other, and the
   server can inform the client as to the service extensions that it
   supports.

   Contemporary SMTP implementations MUST support the basic extension
   mechanisms.  For instance, servers MUST support the EHLO command even
   if they do not implement any specific extensions and clients SHOULD
   preferentially utilize EHLO rather than HELO.  (However, for
   compatibility with older conforming implementations, SMTP clients and
   servers MUST support the original HELO mechanisms as a fallback.)
   Unless the different characteristics of HELO must be identified for
   interoperability purposes, this document discusses only EHLO.

   SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven
   to be very robust.  However, the Internet community now considers
   some services to be important that were not anticipated when the
   protocol was first designed.  If support for those services is to be
   added, it must be done in a way that permits older implementations to
   continue working acceptably.  The extension framework consists of:

   *  The SMTP command EHLO, superseding the earlier HELO,

   *  a registry of SMTP service extensions,

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 15]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   *  additional parameters to the SMTP MAIL and RCPT commands, and

   *  optional replacements for commands defined in this protocol, such
      as for DATA in non-ASCII transmissions (RFC 3030 [38]).

   SMTP's strength comes primarily from its simplicity.  Experience with
   many protocols has shown that protocols with few options tend towards
   ubiquity, whereas protocols with many options tend towards obscurity.

   As part of deciding whether to implement and support an extension,
   regardless of its benefits, each SMTP implementation, each extension
   must be carefully scrutinized with respect to its implementation,
   deployment, and interoperability costs.  In many cases, the cost of
   extending the SMTP service will likely outweigh the benefit.

2.2.2.  Definition and Registration of Extensions

   Especially for extensions intended for general use and expected to
   interoperate well with multiple implementations, a readily-available,
   stable, and adequate definition is essential for those evaluating,
   implementing, or configuring the extension.  The information below
   describes important characteristics of that documentation.  In order
   to make it accessible and to prevent naming conflicts, the IANA
   maintains a registry of SMTP service extensions [64] and each service
   extension must be recorded in that registry as specified in
   Section 8.1.1 and below.

   Experience has shown that obtaining broad review and input from the
   broader community produces much better results than narrower
   discussions, e.g., only among the designers.  While it is usually
   best to obtain that input prior to registration and to do so formally
   as part of an IETF Standards Track specification, there is no
   requirement to do so.  An alternate, simplified, registration
   procedure (see Section 8.1.1.1, Paragraph 6, Item 2) allows
   extensions to be written and registered that permit modifications
   after registration, perhaps even after deployment experience.  Even
   when that simplified procedure is used, and although it is not
   required, it will often be useful for the submitter or IANA to notify
   a relevant IETF mailing list of the extension request.  Registrants
   may also reach out to selected individuals for advice on the
   specification and how to best obtain additional useful input.
   Details of the registration process itself and two available
   registration models appear in Section 8.1.1 below.

   For standards track registrations, the definition and related
   description of the extension will include, not only the keyword name
   and syntax for the service extension and other information required
   for registration, but a detailed description of the purpose of the

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 16]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   extension, what it is expected to accomplish, how its use changes the
   behavior of client and server SMTP implementations that use it, and
   how it interacts with other relevant extensions and elements of this
   specification.  To be of maximum use, the alternative procedure
   should still make that information available.

   Any keyword value presented in the EHLO response MUST correspond to
   an SMTP service extension registered with IANA as described in
   Section 8.1.  A conforming server MUST NOT offer keyword values that
   are not described in a registered extension.

   SMTP Clients MUST ignore any announced extension they do not
   recognize and, if the announcement involves parsing or other problems
   that prevent reliable interpretation of the response to the EHLO
   command, send QUIT and terminate the SMTP session.

2.2.3.  Special Issues with Extensions

   Extensions that change fairly basic properties of SMTP operation are
   permitted.  The text in other sections of this document must be
   understood in that context.  In particular, extensions can change the
   minimum limits specified in Section 4.5.3, can change the ASCII
   character set requirement as mentioned above, or can introduce some
   optional modes of message handling.

   In particular, if an extension implies that the delivery path
   normally supports special features of that extension, and an
   intermediate SMTP system finds a next hop that does not support the
   required extension, it MAY choose, based on the specific extension
   and circumstances, to requeue the message and try later and/or try an
   alternate MX host.  If this strategy is employed, the timeout to fall
   back to an unextended format (if one is available) SHOULD be less
   than the normal timeout for bouncing as undeliverable (e.g., if
   normal timeout is three days, the requeue timeout before attempting
   to transmit the mail without the extension might be one day).

2.3.  SMTP Terminology

2.3.1.  Mail Objects

   SMTP transports a mail object.  A mail object contains an envelope
   and content.

   The SMTP envelope is sent as a series of SMTP protocol units
   (described in Section 3).  It consists of an originator address (to
   which error reports should be directed), one or more recipient
   addresses, and optional protocol extension material.  Historically,
   variations on the reverse-path (originator) address specification

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 17]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   command (MAIL) could be used to specify alternate delivery modes,
   such as immediate display; those variations have now been deprecated
   (see Appendix F and Appendix F.6).

   The SMTP content is sent in the SMTP DATA protocol unit and has two
   parts: the header section and the body.  If the content conforms to
   other contemporary standards, the header section consists of a
   collection of header fields, each consisting of a header name, a
   colon, and data, structured as in the message format specification
   (RFC5322bis [16]); the body, if structured, is defined according to
   MIME (RFC 2045 [30]).  The content is textual in nature, expressed
   using the US-ASCII repertoire [4].  SMTP extensions (such as
   "8BITMIME", RFC 6152 [51]) may relax this restriction for the content
   body and content header fields.  Two MIME extensions (RFC 2047 [31]
   and RFC 2231 [34]) define an algorithm for representing header values
   outside the US-ASCII repertoire, while still encoding them using that
   repertoire.

2.3.2.  Senders and Receivers

   In RFC 821, the two hosts participating in an SMTP transaction were
   described as the "SMTP-sender" and "SMTP-receiver".  This document
   has been changed to reflect current industry terminology and hence
   refers to them as the "SMTP client" (or sometimes just "the client")
   and "SMTP server" (or just "the server"), respectively.  Since a
   given host may act both as server and client in a relay situation,
   "receiver" and "sender" terminology is still used where needed for
   clarity.

2.3.3.  Mail Agents and Message Stores

   Additional mail system terminology became common after RFC 821 was
   published and, where convenient, is used in this specification.  In
   particular, SMTP servers and clients provide a mail transport service
   and therefore act as "Mail Transfer Agents" (MTAs).  "Mail User
   Agents" (MUAs or UAs) are normally thought of as the sources and
   targets of mail.  At the source, an MUA might collect mail to be
   transmitted from a user and hand it off to an MTA or, more commonly
   in recent years, a specialized variation on an MTA called a
   "Submission Server" (MSA) [48].  At the other end of the process, the
   final ("delivery") MTA would be thought of as handing the mail off to
   an MUA (or at least transferring responsibility to it, e.g., by
   depositing the message in a "message store").  However, while these
   terms are used with at least the appearance of great precision in
   other environments, the implied boundaries between MUAs and MTAs
   often do not accurately match common, and conforming, practices with
   Internet mail.  Hence, the reader should be cautious about inferring
   the strong relationships and responsibilities that might be implied

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 18]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   if these terms were used elsewhere.

2.3.4.  Host

   For the purposes of this specification, a host is a computer system
   attached to the Internet (or, in some cases, to a private TCP/IP
   network) and supporting the SMTP protocol.  Hosts are known by names
   (see the next section); they SHOULD NOT be identified by numerical
   addresses, i.e., by address literals as described in Section 4.1.2.

2.3.5.  Domain Names

   A domain name (or often just a "domain") consists of one or more
   components, separated by dots if more than one appears.  In the case
   of a top-level domain used by itself in an email address, a single
   string is used without any dots.  This makes the requirement,
   described in more detail below, that only fully-qualified domain
   names appear in SMTP transactions on the public Internet,
   particularly important where top-level domains are involved.  These
   components ("labels" in the DNS terminology of RFC 1035 [7]) are
   restricted for purposes of SMTP as defined here to consist of a
   sequence of letters, digits, and hyphens drawn from the ASCII
   character set [4] and conforming to what RFC 1035 calls the
   "preferred name syntax", with the exception that leading digits in
   labels are permitted [8].  Domain names are used as names of hosts
   and, except where additionally restricted in this document, of other
   entities in the domain name hierarchy.  For example, a domain may
   refer to a host alias (label of a CNAME RR) or the label of Mail
   eXchanger records to be used to deliver mail instead of representing
   a host name.  See RFC 1035 and Section 5 of this specification.

   The domain name, as described in this document and in RFC 1035 [7],
   MUST be the entire, fully-qualified name (often referred to as an
   "FQDN").  Other than an address literal (see Section 4.1.3) where
   those are permitted, any string that is not a domain name in FQDN
   form is no more than a reference to be interpreted locally.  Such
   local references for domain names MUST NOT appear in any SMTP
   transaction (Cf.  Section 5).  Mechanisms for inferring FQDNs from
   local references (including partial names or local aliases) are
   outside of this specification and normally the province of message
   submission.  Due to a history of problems, SMTP servers SHOULD NOT
   make such inferences (Message Submission Servers [48] have somewhat
   more flexibility) and intermediate (relay) SMTP servers MUST NOT make
   them.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 19]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   When domain names are used in SMTP, and unless further restricted in
   this document, names that can be resolved to MX RRs or address (i.e.,
   A or AAAA) RRs (as discussed in Section 5) are permitted, as are
   CNAME RRs whose targets can be resolved, in turn, to MX or address
   RRs.  There are two exceptions to the rule requiring FQDNs:

   *  The domain name given in the EHLO command MUST be either a primary
      host name (a domain name that resolves to an address RR) or, if
      the host has no name, an address literal, as described in
      Section 4.1.3 and discussed further in the EHLO discussion of
      Section 4.1.4.

   *  The reserved mailbox name "postmaster" MAY be used in a RCPT
      command without domain qualification (see Section 4.1.1.3) and
      MUST be accepted if so used.

2.3.6.  Buffer and State Table

   SMTP sessions are stateful, with both parties carefully maintaining a
   common view of the current state.  In this document, we model this
   state by a virtual "buffer" and a "state table" on the server that
   may be used by the client to, for example, "clear the buffer" or
   "reset the state table", causing the information in the buffer to be
   discarded and the state to be returned to some previous state.

2.3.7.  Commands and Replies

   SMTP commands and, unless altered by a service extension, message
   data, are transmitted from the sender to the receiver via the
   transmission channel in "lines" (defined in Section 2.3.8 below).

   An SMTP reply is an acknowledgment (positive or negative) sent in
   "lines" from receiver to sender via the transmission channel in
   response to a command.  The general form of a reply is a numeric
   completion code (indicating failure or success) usually followed by a
   text string.  The codes are for use by programs and the text is
   usually intended for human users.  RFC 3463 [12], specifies further
   structuring of the reply strings, including the use of supplemental
   and more specific completion codes (see also RFC 5248 [50]).

2.3.8.  Lines

   Lines consist of zero or more data characters terminated by the
   sequence ASCII character "CR" (hex value 0D) followed immediately by
   ASCII character "LF" (hex value 0A).  This termination sequence is
   denoted as <CRLF> in this document.  Conforming implementations MUST
   NOT recognize or generate any other character or character sequence
   as a line terminator.  Limits MAY be imposed on line lengths by

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 20]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   servers (see Section 4).

   In addition, the appearance of "bare" "CR" or "LF" characters in text
   (i.e., either without the other) has a long history of causing
   problems in mail implementations and applications that use the mail
   system as a tool.  Unless negotiated otherwise using an SMTP
   extension, SMTP client implementations MUST NOT transmit these
   characters except when they are intended as line terminators and then
   MUST, as indicated above, transmit them only as a <CRLF> sequence.

2.3.9.  Message Content and Mail Data

   The terms "message content" and "mail data" are used interchangeably
   in this document to describe the material transmitted after the DATA
   command is accepted and before the end of data indication is
   transmitted.  Message content includes the message header section and
   the possibly structured message body.  In the absence of extensions,
   both are required to be ASCII (see Section 2.3.1).  The MIME
   specification (RFC 2045 [30]) provides the standard mechanisms for
   structured message bodies.

2.3.10.  Originator, Delivery, Relay, and Gateway Systems

   This specification makes a distinction among four types of SMTP
   systems, based on the role those systems play in transmitting
   electronic mail.  An "originating" system (sometimes called an SMTP
   originator) introduces mail into the Internet or, more generally,
   into a transport service environment.  A "delivery" SMTP system is
   one that receives mail from a transport service environment and
   passes it to a mail user agent or deposits it in a message store that
   a mail user agent is expected to subsequently access.  A "relay" SMTP
   system (usually referred to just as a "relay") receives mail from an
   SMTP client and transmits it, without modification to the message
   data other than adding trace information (see Section 4.4), to
   another SMTP server for further relaying or for delivery.

   A "gateway" SMTP system (usually referred to just as a "gateway")
   receives mail from a client system in one transport environment and
   transmits it to a server system in another transport environment.
   Differences in protocols or message semantics between the transport
   environments on either side of a gateway may require that the gateway
   system perform transformations to the message that are not permitted
   to SMTP relay systems.  For the purposes of this specification,
   firewalls that rewrite addresses should be considered as gateways,
   even if SMTP is used on both sides of them (see RFC 2979 [37]).

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 21]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

2.3.11.  Mailbox and Address

   As used in this specification, an "address" is a character string
   that identifies a user to whom mail will be sent or a location into
   which mail will be deposited.  The term "mailbox" refers to that
   depository.  The two terms are typically used interchangeably unless
   the distinction between the location in which mail is placed (the
   mailbox) and a reference to it (the address) is important.  An
   address normally consists of user and domain specifications.  The
   standard mailbox naming convention is defined to be "local-
   part@domain"; contemporary usage permits a much broader set of
   applications than simple "user names".  Consequently, and due to a
   long history of problems when intermediate hosts have attempted to
   optimize transport by modifying them, the local-part MUST be
   interpreted and assigned semantics only by the host specified in the
   domain part of the address.

2.3.12.  Sessions and Transactions

   This document distinguishes between an "SMTP session"
   (interchangeable with "mail session") and starting when a connection
   is made between client and server and a "mail transaction", which is
   started and terminated by particular commands.  For more information
   and details, see Section 3.1 and Section 3.3.

2.4.  General Syntax Principles and Transaction Model

   SMTP commands and replies have a rigid syntax.  All commands begin
   with a command verb.  All replies begin with a three digit numeric
   code.  In some commands and replies, arguments are required following
   the verb or reply code.  Some commands do not accept arguments (after
   the verb), and some reply codes are followed, sometimes optionally,
   by free form text.  In both cases, where text appears, it is
   separated from the verb or reply code by a space character.  Complete
   definitions of commands and replies appear in Section 4.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 22]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Verbs and argument values (e.g., "TO:" or "to:" in the RCPT command
   and extension name keywords) are not case sensitive, with the sole
   exception in this specification of a mailbox local-part (SMTP
   Extensions may explicitly specify case-sensitive elements).  That is,
   a command verb, an argument value other than a mailbox local-part,
   and free form text MAY be encoded in upper case, lower case, or any
   mixture of upper and lower case with no impact on its meaning.  The
   local-part of a mailbox MUST BE treated as case sensitive.
   Therefore, SMTP implementations MUST take care to preserve the case
   of mailbox local-parts.  In particular, for some hosts, the user
   "smith" is different from the user "Smith".  However, exploiting the
   case sensitivity of mailbox local-parts impedes interoperability and
   is discouraged.  Mailbox domains follow normal DNS rules and are
   hence not case sensitive.

   A few SMTP servers, in violation of this specification (and RFC 821)
   may require that command verbs be encoded by clients in upper case.
   Implementations MAY wish to employ this encoding to accommodate those
   servers.

   The argument clause consists of a variable-length character string
   ending with the end of the line, i.e., with the character sequence
   <CRLF>.  The receiver will take no action until this sequence is
   received.

   The syntax for each command is shown with the discussion of that
   command.  Common elements and parameters are shown in Section 4.1.2.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 23]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Commands and replies are composed of characters from the ASCII
   character set [4].  When the transport service provides an 8-bit byte
   (octet) transmission channel, each 7-bit character is transmitted,
   right justified, in an octet with the high-order bit cleared to zero.
   More specifically, the unextended SMTP service provides 7-bit
   transport only.  An originating SMTP client that has not successfully
   negotiated an appropriate extension with a particular server (see the
   next paragraph) MUST NOT transmit messages with information in the
   high-order bit of octets.  If such messages are transmitted in
   violation of this rule, receiving SMTP servers MAY clear the high-
   order bit or reject the message as invalid.  In general, a relay SMTP
   SHOULD assume that the message content it has received is valid and,
   assuming that the envelope permits doing so, relay it without
   inspecting that content.  Of course, if the content is mislabeled and
   the data path cannot accept the actual content, this may result in
   the ultimate delivery of a severely garbled message to the recipient.
   Delivery SMTP systems MAY reject such messages, or return them as
   undeliverable, rather than deliver them.  In the absence of a server-
   offered extension explicitly permitting it, a sending SMTP system is
   not permitted to send envelope commands in any character set other
   than US-ASCII.  Receiving systems SHOULD reject such commands,
   normally using "500 syntax error - invalid character" replies.

   8-bit message content transmission MAY be requested of the server by
   a client using extended SMTP facilities, notably the "8BITMIME"
   extension, RFC 6152 [51].  8BITMIME SHOULD be supported by SMTP
   servers.  However, it MUST NOT be construed as authorization to
   transmit unrestricted 8-bit material, nor does 8BITMIME authorize
   transmission of any envelope material encoded in anything other than
   US-ASCII.  8BITMIME MUST NOT be requested by senders for material
   with the high bit on that is not in MIME format with an appropriate
   content-transfer encoding; servers MAY reject such messages.

   The metalinguistic notation used in this document corresponds to the
   "Augmented BNF" used in other Internet mail system documents.  The
   reader who is not familiar with that syntax should consult the ABNF
   specification in RFC 5234 [15].  Metalanguage terms used in running
   text are surrounded by pointed brackets (e.g., <CRLF>) for clarity.
   The reader is cautioned that the grammar expressed in the
   metalanguage is not comprehensive.  There are many instances in which
   provisions in the text constrain or otherwise modify the syntax or
   semantics implied by the grammar.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 24]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

3.  The SMTP Procedures: An Overview

   This section contains descriptions of the procedures used in SMTP:
   session initiation, mail transaction, forwarding mail, verifying
   mailbox names and expanding mailing lists, and opening and closing
   exchanges.  Comments on relaying, a note on mail domains, and a
   discussion of changing roles are included at the end of this section.
   Several complete scenarios are presented in Appendix D.

3.1.  Session Initiation

   An SMTP session (or "mail session") is initiated when a client opens
   a connection to a server and the server responds with an opening
   message.

   SMTP server implementations MAY include identification of their
   software and version information in the connection greeting reply
   after the 220 code, a practice that permits more efficient isolation
   and repair of any problems.  Implementations MAY make provision for
   SMTP servers to disable the software and version announcement where
   it causes security concerns.  While some systems also identify their
   contact point for mail problems, this is not a substitute for
   maintaining the required "postmaster" address (see Section 4).

   The SMTP protocol allows a server to formally reject a mail session
   while still allowing the initial connection as follows: a 521
   response MAY be given in the initial connection opening message
   instead of the 220.  A server taking this approach MUST still wait
   for the client to send a QUIT (see Section 4.1.1.10) before closing
   the connection and SHOULD respond to any intervening commands with
   "503 bad sequence of commands".  Since an attempt to make an SMTP
   connection to such a system is probably in error, a server returning
   a 521 response on connection opening SHOULD provide enough
   information in the reply text to facilitate debugging of the sending
   system.  See Section 4.2.4.2.

3.2.  Client Initiation

   Once the server has sent the greeting (welcoming) message and the
   client has received it, the client normally sends the EHLO command to
   the server, indicating the client's identity.  In addition to opening
   the session, use of EHLO indicates that the client is able to process
   service extensions and requests that the server provide a list of the
   extensions it supports.  Older SMTP systems that are unable to
   support service extensions, and contemporary clients that do not
   require service extensions in the mail session being initiated, MAY
   use HELO instead of EHLO.  Servers MUST NOT return the extended EHLO-
   style response to a HELO command.  For a particular connection

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 25]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   attempt, if the server returns a "command not recognized" response to
   EHLO, the client SHOULD be able to fall back and send HELO.

   In the EHLO (or HELO) command, the host sending the command
   identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as saying "Hello, I
   am <domain>" (and, in the case of EHLO, "and I support service
   extension requests").

3.3.  Mail Transactions

   There are three steps to normal SMTP mail transactions.  The
   transaction starts with a MAIL command that gives the sender
   identification.  (In general, the MAIL command may be sent only when
   no mail transaction is in progress; see Section 4.1.4.)  In a normal
   session, a series of one or more RCPT commands follows, giving the
   receiver information.  Then, a DATA command initiates transfer of the
   mail data and is terminated by the "end of mail" data indicator,
   which also confirms (and terminates) the transaction.

   Mail transactions are also terminated by the RSET command
   (Section 4.1.1.5), the sending of an EHLO command (Section 3.2), or
   the sending of a QUIT command (Section 3.8).  The latter terminates
   not only any active mail transaction but the SMTP connection itself.

   The first step in the procedure is the MAIL command.

      MAIL FROM:<reverse-path> [SP <mail-parameters> ] <CRLF>

   This command tells the SMTP-receiver that a new mail transaction is
   starting and to reset all its state tables and buffers, including any
   recipients or mail data.  The <reverse-path> portion of the first or
   only argument contains the source mailbox (between "<" and ">"
   brackets), which can be used to report errors (see Section 4.2 for a
   discussion of error reporting).  If accepted, the SMTP server returns
   a "250 OK" reply.  If the mailbox specification is not acceptable for
   some reason, the server MUST return a reply indicating whether the
   failure is permanent (i.e., will occur again if the client tries to
   send the same address again) or temporary (i.e., the address might be
   accepted if the client tries again later).  Despite the apparent
   scope of this requirement, there are circumstances in which the
   acceptability of the reverse-path may not be determined until one or
   more forward-paths (in RCPT commands) can be examined.  In those
   cases, the server MAY reasonably accept the reverse-path (with a 250
   reply) and then report problems after the forward-paths are received
   and examined.  Normally, failures produce 550 or 553 replies.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 26]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Historically, the <reverse-path> was permitted to contain more than
   just a mailbox; however source routing is now deprecated (see
   Appendix F.2).

   The optional <mail-parameters> are associated with negotiated SMTP
   service extensions (see Section 2.2).

   The second step in the procedure is the RCPT command.  This step of
   the procedure can be repeated any number of times.

      RCPT TO:<forward-path> [ SP <rcpt-parameters> ] <CRLF>

   The first or only argument to this command includes a forward-path
   (normally a mailbox local-part and domain, always surrounded by "<"
   and ">" brackets) identifying one recipient.  If accepted, the SMTP
   server returns a "250 OK" reply and stores the forward-path.  If the
   recipient is known not to be a deliverable address, the SMTP server
   returns a 550 reply, typically with a string such as "no such user
   - " and the mailbox name (other circumstances and reply codes are
   possible).

   Historically, the <forward-path> was permitted to contain a source
   routing list of hosts and the destination mailbox; however, source
   routes are now deprecated (see Appendix F.2).  Clients MUST NOT
   assume that any SMTP server on the Internet can be used as their mail
   processing (relaying) site.  If a RCPT command appears without a
   previous MAIL command, the server MUST return a 503 "Bad sequence of
   commands" response.  The optional <rcpt-parameters> are associated
   with negotiated SMTP service extensions (see Section 2.2).

   There are two ways that sender-SMTPs can determine the next-hop
   system to which to send the message.  One is to use the DNS and MX
   records as described in Section Section 5.1.  The other involves a
   next-hop destination or choice of destinations that are configured
   into the sender-SMTP to deal with special circumstances such as
   forwarding all messages to a particular host for further processing.

   Since it has been a common source of errors, it is worth noting that
   spaces are not permitted on either side of the colon following FROM
   in the MAIL command or TO in the RCPT command.  The syntax is exactly
   as given above.

   The third step in the procedure is the DATA command (or some
   alternative specified in a service extension).

      DATA <CRLF>

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 27]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   If accepted, the SMTP server returns a 354 Intermediate reply and
   considers all succeeding lines up to but not including the end of
   mail data indicator to be the message text.  When the end of text is
   successfully received and stored, the SMTP-receiver sends a "250 OK"
   reply.

   Since the mail data is sent on the transmission channel, the end of
   mail data must be indicated so that the command and reply dialog can
   be resumed.  An SMTP client indicates the end of the mail data by
   sending a line containing only a "." (period or full stop, hex 2E),
   that is the character sequence "<CRLF>.<CRLF>".  A transparency
   procedure is used to prevent this from interfering with the user's
   text (see Section 4.5.2).

   The end of mail data indicator also confirms the mail transaction and
   tells the SMTP server to now process the stored recipients and mail
   data.  If accepted, the SMTP server returns a "250 OK" reply.  The
   DATA command can fail at only two points in the protocol exchange:

   If there was no MAIL, or no RCPT, command, or all such commands were
   rejected, the server MAY return a "command out of sequence" (503) or
   "no valid recipients" (554) reply in response to the DATA command.
   If one of those replies (or any other 5yz reply) is received, the
   client MUST NOT send the message data; more generally, message data
   MUST NOT be sent unless a 354 reply is received.

   If the verb is initially accepted and the 354 reply issued, the DATA
   command should fail only if the mail transaction was incomplete (for
   example, no recipients), if resources were unavailable (including, of
   course, the server unexpectedly becoming unavailable), or if the
   server determines that the message should be rejected for policy or
   other reasons.

   However, in practice, some servers do not perform recipient
   verification until after the message text is received.  These servers
   SHOULD treat a failure for one or more recipients as a "subsequent
   failure" and return a mail message as discussed in Section 6 and, in
   particular, in Section 6.1.  Using a "550 mailbox not found" (or
   equivalent) reply code after the data are accepted makes it difficult
   or impossible for the client to determine which recipients failed.

   When the RFC 822 format ([17], [16]) is being used, the mail data
   include the header fields such as those named Date, Subject, To, Cc,
   and From.  Server SMTP systems SHOULD NOT reject messages based on
   perceived defects in the RFC 822 or MIME (RFC 2045 [30]) message
   header section or message body.  In particular, they MUST NOT reject
   messages in which the numbers of Resent-header fields do not match or
   Resent-to appears without Resent-from and/or Resent-date.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 28]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Mail transaction commands MUST be used in the order discussed above.

3.4.  Address Modification and Expansion

3.4.1.  Forwarding for Address Correction or Updating

   Forwarding support is most often required to consolidate and simplify
   addresses within, or relative to, some enterprise and less frequently
   to establish addresses to link a person's prior address with a
   current one.  Silent forwarding of messages (without server
   notification to the sender), for security or non-disclosure purposes,
   is common in the contemporary Internet.

   In both the enterprise and the "new address" cases, information
   hiding (and sometimes security) considerations argue against exposure
   of the "final" address through the SMTP protocol as a side effect of
   the forwarding activity.  This may be especially important when the
   final address may not even be reachable by the sender.  Consequently,
   the "forwarding" mechanisms described in Section 3.2 of RFC 821, and
   especially the 251 (corrected destination) and 551 reply codes from
   RCPT must be evaluated carefully by implementers and, when they are
   available, by those configuring systems (see also Section 7.4).

   In particular:

   *  Servers MAY forward messages when they are aware of an address
      change.  When they do so, they MAY either provide address-updating
      information with a 251 code, or may forward "silently" and return
      a 250 code.  However, if a 251 code is used, they MUST NOT assume
      that the client will actually update address information or even
      return that information to the user.

   Alternately,

   *  Servers MAY reject messages or return them as non-deliverable when
      they cannot be delivered precisely as addressed.  When they do so,
      they MAY either provide address-updating information with a 551
      code, or may reject the message as undeliverable with a 550 code
      and no address-specific information.  However, if a 551 code is
      used, they MUST NOT assume that the client will actually update
      address information or even return that information to the user.

   SMTP server implementations that support the 251 and/or 551 reply
   codes SHOULD provide configuration mechanisms so that sites that
   conclude that they would undesirably disclose information can disable
   or restrict their use.  See Section 7.4 for further discussion of
   that issue.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 29]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

3.4.2.  Aliases and Mailing Lists

   Many SMTP-capable hosts support address expansion for multiple
   delivery via one or both of the alias and the list models.  When a
   message is delivered or forwarded to each address of an expanded list
   form, the return address in the envelope ("MAIL FROM:") MUST be
   changed to be the address of a person or other entity who administers
   the list.  This change to the MAIL command does not affect the header
   section of the message.

   An important mail facility is a mechanism for multi-destination
   delivery of a single message, by transforming (or "expanding" or
   "exploding") a pseudo-mailbox address into a list of destination
   mailbox addresses.  When a message is sent to such a pseudo-mailbox
   (sometimes called an "exploder"), copies are forwarded or
   redistributed to each mailbox in the expanded list.  Servers SHOULD
   simply utilize the addresses on the list; application of heuristics
   or other matching rules to eliminate some addresses, such as that of
   the originator, is strongly discouraged.  We classify such a pseudo-
   mailbox as an "alias" or a "list", depending upon the expansion
   rules.

3.4.2.1.  Simple Aliases

   To expand an alias, the recipient mailer simply replaces the pseudo-
   mailbox address in the envelope with each of the expanded addresses
   in turn; the rest of the envelope and the message body are left
   unchanged.  The message is then delivered or forwarded to each
   expanded address.

3.4.2.2.  Mailing Lists

   Processing of a mailing list may be said to operate by
   "redistribution" rather than by "forwarding" (as in the simple alias
   case in the subsection above).  To expand a list, the recipient
   mailer replaces the pseudo-mailbox address in the envelope with each
   of the expanded addresses in turn.  The return (backward-pointing)
   address in the envelope is changed so that all error messages
   generated by the final deliveries will be returned to a list
   administrator, not to the message originator, who generally has no
   control over the contents of the list and will typically find error
   messages annoying.  Note that the key difference between handling
   simple aliases Section 3.4.2.1 and redistribution (this subsection)
   is the change to the backward-pointing address.  When a system
   managing a list constrains its processing to the very limited set of
   modifications and actions described here, it is acting as part of an
   MTA; such list processing, like alias processing, can be treated as a
   continuation of email transit.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 30]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Mailing list management systems do exist that perform additional,
   sometimes extensive, modifications to a message and its envelope.
   Such mailing lists need to be viewed as MUAs that accept a message
   delivery and then submit a new message for multiple recipients.

3.5.  Commands for Debugging Addresses

3.5.1.  Overview

   SMTP provides commands to verify a user name or obtain the content of
   a mailing list.  This is done with the VRFY and EXPN commands, which
   have character string arguments.  Implementations SHOULD support VRFY
   and EXPN (however, see Section 3.5.2 and Section 7.3).

   For the VRFY command, the string is a user name or a user name and
   domain (see below).  If a normal (i.e., 250) response is returned,
   the response MAY include the full name of the user and MUST include
   the mailbox of the user.  It MUST be in one of the following forms:

      User Name <local-part@domain>
      <local-part@domain>
      local-part@domain

   When a name that is the argument to VRFY could identify more than one
   mailbox, the server MAY either note the ambiguity or identify the
   alternatives.  In other words, any of the following are legitimate
   responses to VRFY:

      553 User ambiguous

   or

      553- Ambiguous; Possibilities are
      553-Joe Smith <jsmith@foo.com>
      553-Harry Smith <hsmith@foo.com>
      553 Melvin Smith <dweep@foo.com>

   or

      553-Ambiguous; Possibilities
      553- <jsmith@foo.com>
      553- <hsmith@foo.com>
      553 <dweep@foo.com>

   Under normal circumstances, a client receiving a 553 reply would be
   expected to expose the result to the user.  Use of exactly the forms
   given, and the "user ambiguous" or "ambiguous" keywords, possibly
   supplemented by extended reply codes, such as those described in RFC

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 31]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   3463 [12], will facilitate automated translation into other languages
   as needed.  Of course, a client that was highly automated or that was
   operating in another language than English might choose to try to
   translate the response to return some other indication to the user
   than the literal text of the reply, or to take some automated action
   such as consulting a directory service for additional information
   before reporting to the user.

   For the EXPN command, the string identifies a mailing list, and the
   successful (i.e., 250) multiline response MAY include the full name
   of the users and MUST give the mailboxes on the mailing list.

   In some hosts, the distinction between a mailing list and an alias
   for a single mailbox is a bit fuzzy, since a common data structure
   may hold both types of entries, and it is possible to have mailing
   lists containing only one mailbox.  If a request is made to apply
   VRFY to a mailing list, a positive response MAY be given if a message
   so addressed would be delivered to everyone on the list, otherwise an
   error SHOULD be reported (e.g., "550 That is a mailing list, not a
   user" or "252 Unable to verify members of mailing list").  If a
   request is made to expand a user name, the server MAY return a
   positive response consisting of a list containing one name, or an
   error MAY be reported (e.g., "550 That is a user name, not a mailing
   list").

   In the case of a successful multiline reply (normal for EXPN),
   exactly one mailbox is to be specified on each line of the reply.
   The case of an ambiguous request is discussed above.

   "User name" is a fuzzy term and has been used deliberately.  An
   implementation of the VRFY or EXPN commands MUST include at least
   recognition of local mailboxes as "user names".  However, since
   current Internet practice often results in a single host handling
   mail for multiple domains, hosts, especially hosts that provide this
   functionality, SHOULD accept the "local-part@domain" form as a "user
   name"; hosts MAY also choose to recognize other strings as "user
   names".

   The case of expanding a mailbox list requires a multiline reply, such
   as:

      C: EXPN Example-People
      S: 250-Jon Postel <Postel@isi.edu>
      S: 250-Fred Fonebone <Fonebone@physics.foo-u.edu>
      S: 250 Sam Q. Smith <SQSmith@specific.generic.com>

   or

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 32]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

      C: EXPN Executive-Washroom-List
      S: 550 Access Denied to You.

   The character string arguments of the VRFY and EXPN commands cannot
   be further restricted due to the variety of implementations of the
   user name and mailbox list concepts.  On some systems, it may be
   appropriate for the argument of the EXPN command to be a file name
   for a file containing a mailing list, but again there are a variety
   of file naming conventions on the Internet.  Similarly, historical
   variations in what is returned by these commands are such that the
   response should be interpreted very carefully, if at all, and SHOULD
   generally only be used for diagnostic purposes.

3.5.2.  VRFY Normal Response

   When normal (2yz or 551) responses are returned from a VRFY or EXPN
   request, the reply MUST include the <Mailbox> name using a "<local-
   part@domain>" construction, where "domain" is a fully-qualified
   domain name.  In circumstances exceptional enough to justify
   violating the intent of this specification, free-form text MAY be
   returned.  In order to facilitate parsing by both computers and
   people, addresses SHOULD appear in pointed brackets.  When addresses,
   rather than free-form debugging information, are returned, EXPN and
   VRFY MUST return only valid domain addresses that are usable in SMTP
   RCPT commands.  Consequently, if an address implies delivery to a
   program or other system, the mailbox name used to reach that target
   MUST be given.  Paths (explicit source routes) MUST NOT be returned
   by VRFY or EXPN.

   Server implementations SHOULD support both VRFY and EXPN.  For
   security reasons, implementations MAY provide local installations a
   way to disable either or both of these commands through configuration
   options or the equivalent (see Section 7.3).  When these commands are
   supported, they are not required to work across relays when relaying
   is supported.  Since they were both optional in RFC 821, but VRFY was
   made mandatory in RFC 1123 [10], if EXPN is supported, it MUST be
   listed as a service extension in an EHLO response.  VRFY MAY be
   listed as a convenience but, since support for it is required, SMTP
   clients are not required to check for its presence on the extension
   list before using it.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 33]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

3.5.3.  Meaning of VRFY or EXPN Success Response

   A server MUST NOT return a 250 code in response to a VRFY or EXPN
   command unless it has actually verified the address.  In particular,
   a server MUST NOT return 250 if all it has done is to verify that the
   syntax given is valid.  If only a syntax check is made, 502 (Command
   not implemented) or 500 (Syntax error, command unrecognized) SHOULD
   be returned.  As stated elsewhere, implementation (in the sense of
   actually validating addresses and returning information) of VRFY and
   EXPN are strongly recommended.  Hence, implementations that return
   500 or 502 for VRFY are not in full compliance with this
   specification.

   There may be circumstances where an address appears to be valid but
   cannot reasonably be verified in real time, particularly when a
   server is acting as a mail exchanger for another server or domain.
   "Apparent validity", in this case, would normally involve at least
   syntax checking and might involve verification that any domains
   specified were ones to which the host expected to be able to relay
   mail.  In these situations, reply code 252 SHOULD be returned.  These
   cases parallel the discussion of RCPT verification in Section 2.1.
   Similarly, the discussion in Section 3.4.1 applies to the use of
   reply codes 251 and 551 with VRFY (and EXPN) to indicate addresses
   that are recognized but that would be forwarded or rejected were mail
   received for them.  Implementations generally SHOULD be more
   aggressive about address verification in the case of VRFY than in the
   case of RCPT, even if it takes a little longer to do so.

3.5.4.  Semantics and Applications of EXPN

   EXPN is often very useful in debugging and understanding problems
   with mailing lists and multiple-target-address aliases.  Some systems
   have attempted to use source expansion of mailing lists as a means of
   eliminating duplicates.  The propagation of aliasing systems with
   mail on the Internet for hosts (typically with MX and CNAME DNS
   records), for mailboxes (various types of local host aliases), and in
   various proxying arrangements has made it nearly impossible for these
   strategies to work consistently, and mail systems SHOULD NOT attempt
   them.

3.6.  Relaying and Mail Routing

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 34]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

3.6.1.  Mail eXchange Records and Relaying

   A relay SMTP server is usually the target of a DNS MX record that
   designates it, rather than the final delivery system.  The relay
   server may accept or reject the task of relaying the mail in the same
   way it accepts or rejects mail for a local user.  If it accepts the
   task, it then becomes an SMTP client, establishes a transmission
   channel to the next SMTP server specified in the DNS (according to
   the rules in Section 5), and sends it the mail.  If it declines to
   relay mail to a particular address for policy reasons, a 550 response
   SHOULD be returned.

   This specification does not deal with the verification of return
   paths.  Server efforts to verify a return path and actions to be
   taken under various circumstances are outside the scope of this
   specification.

   It is important to note that MX records can point to SMTP servers
   that act as gateways into other environments, not just SMTP relays
   and final delivery systems; see Sections 3.7 and 5.

   If an SMTP server has accepted the task of relaying the mail and
   later finds that the destination is incorrect or that the mail cannot
   be delivered for some other reason, then it MUST construct an
   "undeliverable mail" notification message and send it to the
   originator of the undeliverable mail (as indicated by the reverse-
   path).  Formats specified for non-delivery reports by other standards
   (see, for example, RFC 3461 [39] and RFC 3464 [40]) SHOULD be used if
   possible.

   This notification message must be from the SMTP server at the relay
   host or the host that first determines that delivery cannot be
   accomplished.  Of course, SMTP servers MUST NOT send notification
   messages about problems transporting notification messages.  One way
   to prevent loops in error reporting is to specify a null reverse-path
   in the MAIL command of a notification message.  When such a message
   is transmitted, the reverse-path MUST be set to null (see
   Section 4.5.5 for additional discussion).  A MAIL command with a null
   reverse-path appears as follows:

      MAIL FROM:<>

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 35]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   As discussed in Section 6.4, a relay SMTP has no need to inspect or
   act upon the header section or body of the message data and MUST NOT
   do so except to add its own "Received:" header field (Section 4.4.1
   and possibly other trace header fields) and, optionally, to attempt
   to detect looping in the mail system (see Section 6.3).  Of course,
   this prohibition also applies to any modifications of these header
   fields or text (see also Section 7.9).

3.6.2.  Message Submission Servers as Relays

   Many mail-sending clients exist, especially in conjunction with
   facilities that receive mail via POP3 or IMAP, that have limited
   capability to support some of the requirements of this specification,
   such as the ability to queue messages for subsequent delivery
   attempts.  For these clients, it is common practice to make private
   arrangements to send all messages to a single server for processing
   and subsequent distribution.  SMTP, as specified here, is not ideally
   suited for this role.  A standardized mail submission protocol has
   been developed that is gradually superseding practices based on SMTP
   (see RFC 6409 [48]).  In any event, because these arrangements are
   private and fall outside the scope of this specification, they are
   not described here.

3.7.  Mail Gatewaying

   While the relay function discussed above operates within the Internet
   SMTP transport service environment, MX records or various forms of
   explicit routing may require that an intermediate SMTP server perform
   a translation function between one transport service and another.  As
   discussed in Section 2.3.10, when such a system is at the boundary
   between two transport service environments, we refer to it as a
   "gateway" or "gateway SMTP".

   Gatewaying mail between different mail environments, such as
   different mail formats and protocols, is complex and does not easily
   yield to standardization.  However, some general requirements may be
   given for a gateway between the Internet and another mail
   environment.

3.7.1.  Header Fields in Gatewaying

   Header fields MAY be rewritten when necessary as messages are
   gatewayed across mail environment boundaries.  This may involve
   inspecting the message body or interpreting the local-part of the
   destination address in spite of the prohibitions in Section 6.4.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 36]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Other mail systems gatewayed to the Internet often use a subset of
   the RFC 822 header section or provide similar functionality with a
   different syntax, but some of these mail systems do not have an
   equivalent to the SMTP envelope.  Therefore, when a message leaves
   the Internet environment, it may be necessary to fold the SMTP
   envelope information into the message header section.  A possible
   solution would be to create new header fields to carry the envelope
   information (e.g., "X-SMTP-MAIL:" and "X-SMTP-RCPT:"); however, this
   would require changes in mail programs in foreign environments and
   might risk disclosure of private information (see Section 7.2).

3.7.2.  Received Lines in Gatewaying

   When forwarding a message into or out of the Internet environment, a
   gateway MUST prepend a Received: line ("header field", see
   Section 4.4.1), but it MUST NOT alter in any way a Received: line
   that is already in the header section.

   "Received:" header fields of messages originating from other
   environments may not conform exactly to this specification.  However,
   the most important use of Received: lines is for debugging mail
   faults, and this debugging can be severely hampered by well-meaning
   gateways that try to "fix" a Received: line.  As another consequence
   of trace header fields arising in non-SMTP environments, receiving
   systems MUST NOT reject mail based on the format of a trace header
   field and SHOULD be extremely robust in the light of unexpected
   information or formats in those header fields.

   The gateway SHOULD indicate the environment and protocol in the "via"
   clauses of Received header field(s) that it supplies.

3.7.3.  Addresses in Gatewaying

   From the Internet side, the gateway SHOULD accept all valid address
   formats in SMTP commands and in the RFC 822 header section, and all
   valid RFC 822 messages.  Addresses and header fields generated by
   gateways MUST conform to applicable standards (including this one and
   RFC5322bis [16]).  Gateways are, of course, subject to the same rules
   for handling source routes as those described for other SMTP systems
   in Section 3.3.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 37]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

3.7.4.  Other Header Fields in Gatewaying

   The gateway MUST ensure that all header fields of a message that it
   forwards into the Internet mail environment meet the requirements for
   Internet mail.  In particular, all addresses in "From:", "To:",
   "Cc:", etc., header fields MUST be transformed (if necessary) to
   satisfy the standard header syntax of RFC5322bis [16], MUST reference
   only fully-qualified domain names, and MUST be effective and useful
   for sending replies.  The translation algorithm used to convert mail
   from the Internet protocols to another environment's protocol SHOULD
   ensure that error messages from the foreign mail environment are
   delivered to the reverse-path from the SMTP envelope, not to an
   address in the "From:", "Sender:", or similar header fields of the
   message.

3.7.5.  Envelopes in Gatewaying

   Similarly, when forwarding a message from another environment into
   the Internet, the gateway SHOULD set the envelope return path in
   accordance with an error message return address, if supplied by the
   foreign environment.  If the foreign environment has no equivalent
   concept, the gateway must select and use a best approximation, with
   the message originator's address as the default of last resort.

3.8.  Terminating Sessions and Connections

   An SMTP connection is terminated when the client sends a QUIT
   command.  The server responds with a positive reply code, after which
   it closes the connection.

   An SMTP server MUST NOT intentionally close the connection under
   normal operational circumstances (see Section 7.8) except:

   *  After receiving a QUIT command and responding with a 221 reply.

   *  After detecting the need to shut down the SMTP service and
      returning a 421 reply code.  This reply code can be issued after
      the server receives any command or, if necessary, asynchronously
      from command receipt (on the assumption that the client will
      receive it after the next command is issued).

   *  After a timeout, as specified in Section 4.5.3.2, occurs waiting
      for the client to send a command or data.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 38]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   In particular, a server that closes connections in response to
   commands that are not understood is in violation of this
   specification.  Servers are expected to be tolerant of unknown
   commands, issuing a 500 reply and awaiting further instructions from
   the client.

   An SMTP server that is forcibly shut down via external means SHOULD
   attempt to send a line containing a 421 reply code to the SMTP client
   before exiting.  The SMTP client will normally read the 421 reply
   code after sending its next command.

   SMTP clients that experience a connection close, reset, or other
   communications failure due to circumstances not under their control
   (in violation of the intent of this specification but sometimes
   unavoidable) SHOULD, to maintain the robustness of the mail system,
   treat the mail transaction as if a 421 response had been received and
   act accordingly.

   There are circumstances, contrary to the intent of this
   specification, in which an SMTP server may receive an indication that
   the underlying TCP connection has been closed or reset.  To preserve
   the robustness of the mail system, SMTP servers SHOULD be prepared
   for this condition and SHOULD treat it as if a QUIT had been received
   before the connection disappeared.

4.  The SMTP Specifications

4.1.  SMTP Commands

4.1.1.  Command Semantics and Syntax

   The SMTP commands define the mail transfer or the mail system
   function requested by the user.  SMTP commands are character strings
   terminated by <CRLF>.  The commands themselves are alphabetic
   characters terminated by <SP> if parameters follow and <CRLF>
   otherwise.  (In the interest of improved interoperability, SMTP
   receivers SHOULD tolerate trailing white space before the terminating
   <CRLF>.)  The syntax of the local part of a mailbox MUST conform to
   receiver site conventions and the syntax specified in Section 4.1.2.
   The SMTP commands are discussed below.  The SMTP replies are
   discussed in Section 4.2.

   A mail transaction involves several data objects that are
   communicated as arguments to different commands.  The reverse-path is
   the argument of the MAIL command, the forward-path is the argument of
   the RCPT command, and the mail data is the argument of the DATA
   command.  These arguments or data objects must be transmitted and
   held, pending the confirmation communicated by the end of mail data

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 39]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   indication that finalizes the transaction.  The model for this is
   that distinct buffers are provided to hold the types of data objects;
   that is, there is a reverse-path buffer, a forward-path buffer, and a
   mail data buffer.  Specific commands cause information to be appended
   to a specific buffer, or cause one or more buffers to be cleared.

   Several commands (RSET, DATA, QUIT) are specified as not permitting
   parameters.  In the absence of specific extensions offered by the
   server and accepted by the client, clients MUST NOT send such
   parameters and servers SHOULD reject commands containing them as
   having invalid syntax.

4.1.1.1.  Extended HELLO (EHLO) or HELLO (HELO)

   These commands are used to identify the SMTP client to the SMTP
   server.  The argument clause contains the fully-qualified domain name
   of the SMTP client, if one is available.  In situations in which the
   SMTP client system does not have a meaningful domain name (e.g., when
   its address is dynamically allocated and no reverse mapping record is
   available), the client SHOULD send an address literal (see
   Section 4.1.3).  Additional discussion of domain names in SMTP
   commands appears in Section 2.3.5.

   RFC 2821, and some earlier informal practices, encouraged following
   the literal by information that would help to identify the client
   system.  That convention was not widely supported, and many SMTP
   servers considered it an error.  In the interest of interoperability,
   it is probably wise for servers to be prepared for this string to
   occur, but SMTP clients SHOULD NOT send it.

   The SMTP server identifies itself to the SMTP client in the
   connection greeting reply and in the response to this command.

   A client SMTP SHOULD start an SMTP session by issuing the EHLO
   command.  If the SMTP server supports the SMTP service extensions, it
   will give a successful response, a failure response, or an error
   response.  If the SMTP server, in violation of this specification,
   does not support any SMTP service extensions, it will generate an
   error response.  Older client SMTP systems MAY, as discussed above,
   use HELO (as specified in RFC 821) instead of EHLO, and servers MUST
   support the HELO command and reply properly to it.  In any event, a
   client MUST issue HELO or EHLO before starting a mail transaction.

   These commands, and a "250 OK" reply to one of them, confirm that
   both the SMTP client and the SMTP server are in the initial state,
   that is, there is no transaction in progress and all state tables and
   buffers are cleared.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 40]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Syntax:

   ehlo           = "EHLO" SP ( Domain / address-literal ) CRLF

   helo           = "HELO" SP Domain CRLF

   Normally, the response to EHLO will be a multiline reply.  Each line
   of the response contains a keyword and, optionally, one or more
   parameters.  Following the normal syntax for multiline replies, these
   keywords follow the code (250) and a hyphen for all but the last
   line, and the code and a space for the last line.  The syntax for a
   positive response, using the ABNF notation and terminal symbols of
   RFC 5234 [15], is:

   ehlo-ok-rsp =    ( "250" SP Domain [ SP ehlo-greet ] CRLF )
                    / ( "250-" Domain [ SP ehlo-greet ] CRLF
                    *( "250-" ehlo-line CRLF )
                    "250" SP ehlo-line CRLF )

   ehlo-greet =     1*(%d0-9 / %d11-12 / %d14-127)
                    ; string of any characters other than CR or LF

   ehlo-line =      ehlo-keyword *( SP ehlo-param )

   ehlo-keyword =   (ALPHA / DIGIT) *(ALPHA / DIGIT / "-")
                    ; additional syntax of ehlo-params depends on
                    ; ehlo-keyword

   ehlo-param =     1*(%d33-126)
                    ; any CHAR excluding <SP> and all
                    ; control characters (US-ASCII 0-31 and 127
                    ; inclusive)

   Although EHLO keywords may be specified in upper, lower, or mixed
   case, they MUST always be recognized and processed in a case-
   insensitive manner.  This is simply an extension of practices
   specified in RFC 821 and Section 2.4.

   The EHLO response MUST contain keywords (and associated parameters if
   required) for all commands not listed as "required" in Section 4.5.1.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 41]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

4.1.1.2.  MAIL (MAIL)

   This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail
   data is delivered to an SMTP server that may, in turn, deliver it to
   one or more mailboxes or pass it on to another system (possibly using
   SMTP).  The argument clause contains a reverse-path and may contain
   optional parameters.  In general, the MAIL command may be sent only
   when no mail transaction is in progress, see Section 4.1.4.

   The reverse-path consists of the sender mailbox.  Historically, that
   mailbox might optionally have been preceded by a list of hosts, but
   that behavior is now deprecated (see Appendix F.2).  In some types of
   reporting messages for which a reply is likely to cause a mail loop
   (for example, mail delivery and non-delivery notifications), the
   reverse-path may be null (see Section 3.6).

   This command clears the reverse-path buffer, the forward-path buffer,
   and the mail data buffer, and it inserts the reverse-path information
   from its argument clause into the reverse-path buffer.

   If service extensions were negotiated, the MAIL command may also
   carry parameters associated with a particular service extension.

   Syntax:

   mail = "MAIL FROM:" Reverse-path
                  [SP Mail-parameters] CRLF

4.1.1.3.  RECIPIENT (RCPT)

   This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail
   data; multiple recipients are specified by multiple uses of this
   command.  The argument clause contains a forward-path and may contain
   optional parameters.

   The forward-path consists of the required destination mailbox.   When
   mail reaches its ultimate destination, the SMTP server inserts it
   into the destination mailbox in accordance with its host mail
   conventions.

   Prior versions of the SMTP specification included text and examples
   in this section of use of the deprecated source route construct.  If
   desired, see Appendix F.2 for discussion of that mechanism.

   This command appends its forward-path argument to the forward-path
   buffer; it does not change the reverse-path buffer nor the mail data
   buffer.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 42]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   For example, mail received at relay host xyz.com with envelope
   commands

      MAIL FROM:<userx@y.foo.org>
      RCPT TO:<userc@d.bar.org>

   will result in a DNS lookup for d.bar.org and transmission to the
   host specified in the most-preferred MX record that is available (or
   by the address record if there are no MX records).  It will use
   envelope commands identical to the above, i.e.,

      MAIL FROM:<userx@y.foo.org>
      RCPT TO:<userc@d.bar.org>

   Since hosts are not required to relay mail at all, xyz.com MAY also
   reject the message entirely when the RCPT command is received, using
   a 550 code (since this is a "policy reason").

   If the SMTP server determines that a message sent to the mailbox in
   the forward-path is not deliverable, it MUST either return an
   appropriate response code (see Section 4.2.2) or generate a non-
   delivery notification.

   If there were multiple failed recipients, either a single
   notification listing all of the failed recipients or separate
   notification messages MUST be sent for each failed recipient.  For
   economy of processing by the sender, the former SHOULD be used when
   possible.  All notification messages about undeliverable mail MUST be
   sent using the MAIL command and MUST use a null return path as
   discussed in Section 3.6.

   If service extensions were negotiated, the RCPT command may also
   carry parameters associated with a particular service extension
   offered by the server.  The client MUST NOT transmit parameters other
   than those associated with a service extension offered by the server
   in its EHLO response.

   Syntax:

   rcpt = "RCPT TO:" ( "<Postmaster@" Domain ">" / "<Postmaster>" /
                  Forward-path ) [SP Rcpt-parameters] CRLF

   Note that, in a departure from the usual rules for local-parts, the
   "Postmaster" string shown above is treated as case-insensitive.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 43]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

4.1.1.4.  DATA (DATA)

   The receiver normally sends a 354 response to DATA, and then treats
   the lines (strings ending in <CRLF> sequences, as described in
   Section 2.3.8) following the command as mail data from the sender.
   This command causes the mail data to be appended to the mail data
   buffer.  Unless some other character or non-character encoding is
   negotiated with an SMTP extension, the mail data may contain any of
   the 128 ASCII character codes.  Experience has indicated that use of
   ASCII or ASCII-derived control characters other than SP, HT, CR, and
   LF may cause problems and SHOULD be avoided when possible.

   The mail data are terminated by a line containing only a period, that
   is, the character sequence "<CRLF>.<CRLF>", where the first <CRLF> is
   actually the terminator of the previous line (see Section 4.5.2).
   This is the end of mail data indication.  The first <CRLF> of this
   terminating sequence is also the <CRLF> that ends the final line of
   the data (message text) or, if there was no mail data, ends the DATA
   command itself (the "no mail data" case does not conform to this
   specification since it would require that neither the trace header
   fields required by this specification nor the message header section
   required by RFC 5322bis [16] be transmitted).  An extra <CRLF> MUST
   NOT be added, as that would cause an empty line to be added to the
   message.  The only exception to this rule would arise if the message
   body were passed to the originating SMTP-sender with a final "line"
   that did not end in <CRLF>; in that case, the originating SMTP system
   MUST either reject the message as invalid or add <CRLF> in order to
   have the receiving SMTP server recognize the "end of data" condition.

   The custom of accepting lines ending only in <LF>, as a concession to
   non-conforming behavior on the part of some UNIX systems, has proven
   to cause more interoperability problems than it solves, and SMTP
   server systems MUST NOT do this, even in the name of improved
   robustness.  In particular, the sequence "<LF>.<LF>" (bare line
   feeds, without carriage returns) MUST NOT be treated as equivalent to
   <CRLF>.<CRLF> as the end of mail data indication.

   Receipt of the end of mail data indication requires the server to
   process the stored mail transaction information.  This processing
   consumes the information in the reverse-path buffer, the forward-path
   buffer, and the mail data buffer, and on the completion of this
   command these buffers are cleared.  If the processing is successful,
   the receiver MUST send an OK reply.  If the processing fails, the
   receiver MUST send a failure reply.  The SMTP model does not allow
   for partial failures at this point: either the message is accepted by
   the server for delivery and a positive response is returned or it is
   not accepted and a failure reply is returned (see Section 4.4.3 for
   additional discussion).  In sending a positive "250 OK" completion

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 44]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   reply to the end of data indication, the receiver takes full
   responsibility for the message (see Section 6.1).  Errors that are
   diagnosed subsequently MUST be reported in a mail message.

   When the SMTP server accepts a message either for relaying or for
   final delivery, it inserts a trace record (also referred to
   interchangeably as a "time stamp line", "Received" line, or
   "Received:" header field) at the top of the mail data.  This trace
   record indicates the identity of the host that sent the message, the
   identity of the host that received the message (and is inserting this
   time stamp), and the date and time the message was received.  Relayed
   messages will have multiple time stamp lines.  Details for formation
   of these lines, including their syntax, is specified in Section 4.4.

   Additional discussion about the operation of the DATA command appears
   in Section 3.3.

   Syntax:

      data = "DATA" CRLF

4.1.1.5.  RESET (RSET)

   This command specifies that the current mail transaction will be
   aborted.  Any stored sender, recipients, and mail data MUST be
   discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared.  The receiver
   MUST send a "250 OK" reply to a RSET command with no arguments.  A
   reset command may be issued by the client at any time.  It is
   effectively equivalent to a NOOP (i.e., it has no effect) if issued
   immediately after EHLO, before EHLO is issued in the session, after
   an end of data indicator has been sent and acknowledged, or
   immediately before a QUIT.  An SMTP server MUST NOT close the
   connection as the result of receiving a RSET; that action is reserved
   for QUIT (see Section 4.1.1.10).

   Since EHLO implies some additional processing and response by the
   server, RSET will normally be more efficient than reissuing that
   command, even though the formal semantics are the same.

   Syntax:

      rset = "RSET" CRLF

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 45]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

4.1.1.6.  VERIFY (VRFY)

   This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument
   identifies a user or mailbox.  If it is a user name, information is
   returned as specified in Section 3.5.

   This command has no effect on the reverse-path buffer, the forward-
   path buffer, or the mail data buffer.

   Syntax:

      vrfy = "VRFY" SP String CRLF

4.1.1.7.  EXPAND (EXPN)

   This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument
   identifies a mailing list, and if so, to return the membership of
   that list.  If the command is successful, a reply is returned
   containing information as described in Section 3.5.  This reply will
   have multiple lines except in the trivial case of a one-member list.

   This command has no effect on the reverse-path buffer, the forward-
   path buffer, or the mail data buffer, and it may be issued at any
   time.

   Syntax:

      expn = "EXPN" SP String CRLF

4.1.1.8.  HELP (HELP)

   This command causes the server to send helpful information to the
   client.  The command MAY take an argument (e.g., any command name)
   and return more specific information as a response.

   This command has no effect on the reverse-path buffer, the forward-
   path buffer, or the mail data buffer, and it may be issued at any
   time.

   SMTP servers SHOULD support HELP without arguments and MAY support it
   with arguments.

   Syntax:

      help = "HELP" [ SP String ] CRLF

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 46]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

4.1.1.9.  NOOP (NOOP)

   This command does not affect any parameters or previously entered
   commands.  It specifies no action other than that the receiver send a
   "250 OK" reply.

   This command has no effect on the reverse-path buffer, the forward-
   path buffer, or the mail data buffer, and it may be issued at any
   time.  If a parameter string is specified, servers SHOULD ignore it.

   Syntax:

      noop = "NOOP" [ SP String ] CRLF

4.1.1.10.  QUIT (QUIT)

   This command specifies that the receiver MUST send a "221 OK" reply,
   and then close the transmission channel.

   The receiver MUST NOT intentionally close the transmission channel
   until it receives and replies to a QUIT command (even if there was an
   error).  The sender MUST NOT intentionally close the transmission
   channel until it sends a QUIT command, and it SHOULD wait until it
   receives the reply (even if there was an error response to a previous
   command).  If the connection is closed prematurely due to violations
   of the above or system or network failure, the server MUST cancel any
   pending transaction, but not undo any previously completed
   transaction, and generally MUST act as if the command or transaction
   in progress had received a temporary error (i.e., a 4yz response).

   The QUIT command may be issued at any time.  Any current uncompleted
   mail transaction will be aborted.

   Syntax:

      quit = "QUIT" CRLF

4.1.1.11.  Mail-Parameter and Rcpt-Parameter Error Responses

   If the server SMTP does not recognize or cannot implement one or more
   of the parameters associated with a particular MAIL or RCPT command,
   it will return code 555.

   If, for some reason, the server is temporarily unable to accommodate
   one or more of the parameters associated with a MAIL or RCPT command,
   and if the definition of the specific parameter does not mandate the
   use of another code, it should return code 455.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 47]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Errors specific to particular parameters and their values will be
   specified in the document that defines the parameter.

4.1.2.  Command Argument Syntax

   The syntax of the argument clauses of the above commands (using the
   syntax specified in RFC 5234 [15] where applicable) is given below.
   Some terminals not defined in this document, but are defined
   elsewhere, specifically:

   *  In the "core" syntax in Appendix B of RFC 5234 [15]: ALPHA , CRLF
      , DIGIT , HEXDIG , and SP

   *  In the message format syntax in RFC5322bis [16]: atext , CFWS ,
      and FWS .

   Reverse-path   = Path / "<>"

   Forward-path   = Path

   Path           = "<" Mailbox ">"

   Mail-parameters  = esmtp-param *(SP esmtp-param)

   Rcpt-parameters  = esmtp-param *(SP esmtp-param)

   esmtp-param    = esmtp-keyword ["=" esmtp-value]

   esmtp-keyword  = (ALPHA / DIGIT) *(ALPHA / DIGIT / "-")

   esmtp-value    = 1*(%d33-60 / %d62-126)
                  ; any CHAR excluding "=", SP, and control
                  ; characters.  If this string is an email address,
                  ; i.e., a Mailbox, then the "xtext" syntax [39]
                  ; SHOULD be used.

   Keyword        = Ldh-str

   Argument       = Atom

   Domain         = sub-domain *("." sub-domain)

   sub-domain     = Let-dig [Ldh-str]

   Let-dig        = ALPHA / DIGIT

   Ldh-str        = *( ALPHA / DIGIT / "-" ) Let-dig

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 48]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   address-literal  = "[" ( IPv4-address-literal /
                  IPv6-address-literal /
                  General-address-literal ) "]"
                  ; See Section 4.1.3

   Mailbox        = Local-part "@" ( Domain / address-literal )

   Local-part     = Dot-string / Quoted-string
                  ; MAY be case-sensitive

   Dot-string     = Atom *("."  Atom)

   Atom           = 1*atext

   Quoted-string  = DQUOTE 1*QcontentSMTP DQUOTE

   QcontentSMTP   = qtextSMTP / quoted-pairSMTP

   quoted-pairSMTP  = %d92 %d32-126
                  ; i.e., backslash followed by any ASCII
                  ; graphic (including itself) or SPace

   qtextSMTP      = %d32-33 / %d35-91 / %d93-126
                  ; i.e., within a quoted string, any
                  ; ASCII graphic or space is permitted
                  ; without backslash-quoting except
                  ; double-quote and the backslash itself.

   String         = Atom / Quoted-string

   Note that the backslash, "\", is a quote character, which is used to
   indicate that the next character is to be used literally (instead of
   its normal interpretation).  For example, "Joe\,Smith" indicates a
   single nine-character user name string with the comma being the
   fourth character of that string.

   While the above definition for Local-part is relatively permissive,
   for maximum interoperability, a mailbox SHOULD NOT be defined with
   Local-part requiring (or using) the Quoted-string form or with the
   Local-part being case-sensitive.  Further, when comparing a Local-
   part (e.g., to a specific mailbox name), all quoting MUST be treated
   as equivalent.  A sending system SHOULD transmit the form that uses
   the minimum quoting possible.

   For example, the following 3 local-parts are equivalent and MUST
   compare equal: "ab cd ef", "ab\ cd ef" and "ab\ \cd ef".    
   Similarly, "fred" and fred must compare equal.  White space
   reduction    MUST NOT be applied to Local-part by intermediate

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 49]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   systems.  As particular examples, systems that are not making final
   delivery MUST NOT make assumptions about the relationships among
   "ab   cd"@example.com and "ab cd"@example.com or even " "@example.com
   and ""@example.com.

   In the absence of extensions, systems MUST NOT define mailboxes in
   such a way as to require the use in SMTP of non-ASCII characters
   (octets with the high order bit set to one) or ASCII "control
   characters" (decimal value 0-31 and 127) [4][5].  Extensions have
   been standardized for such use [42][43].  When these extensions are
   not in use, these characters MUST NOT be used in MAIL or RCPT
   commands or other commands that require mailbox names.

   To promote interoperability and consistent with long-standing
   guidance about conservative use of the DNS in naming and applications
   (e.g., see Section 2.3.1 of the base DNS document, RFC 1035 [7]),
   characters outside the set of alphabetic characters, digits, and
   hyphen MUST NOT appear in domain name labels for SMTP clients or
   servers.  In particular, the underscore character is not permitted.
   SMTP servers that receive a command in which invalid character codes
   have been employed, and for which there are no other reasons for
   rejection, MUST reject that command with a 501 response (this rule,
   like others, could be overridden by appropriate SMTP extensions).

4.1.3.  Address Literals

   Sometimes a host is not known to the domain name system and
   communication (and, in particular, communication to report and repair
   the error) is blocked.  To bypass this barrier, a special literal
   form of the address is allowed as an alternative to a domain name.
   For IPv4 addresses, this form uses four small decimal integers
   separated by dots and enclosed by brackets such as [123.255.37.2],
   which indicates an (IPv4) Internet Address in sequence-of-octets
   form.  For IPv6 and other forms of addressing that might eventually
   be standardized, the form consists of a standardized "tag" that
   identifies the address syntax, a colon, and the address itself, in a
   format specified as part of the relevant standards (i.e., RFC 4291
   [14] for IPv6).

   Specifically:

   IPv4-address-literal  = Snum 3("."  Snum)

   IPv6-address-literal  = "IPv6:" IPv6-addr

   General-address-literal  = Standardized-tag ":" 1*dcontent

   Standardized-tag  = Ldh-str

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 50]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

                  ; Standardized-tag MUST be specified in a
                  ; Standards-Track RFC and registered with IANA
                  ; See Section 8.1.2.

   dcontent       = %d33-90 / ; Printable US-ASCII
                  %d94-126 ; excl. "[", "\", "]"

   Snum           = 1*3DIGIT
                  ; representing a decimal integer
                  ; value in the range 0 through 255

   IPv6-addr      = 6( h16 ":" ) ls32
                  / "::" 5( h16 ":" ) ls32
                  / [ h16 ] "::" 4( h16 ":" ) ls32
                  / [ *1( h16 ":" ) h16 ] "::" 3( h16 ":" ) ls32
                  / [ *2( h16 ":" ) h16 ] "::" 2( h16 ":" ) ls32
                  / [ *3( h16 ":" ) h16 ] "::" h16 ":" ls32
                  / [ *4( h16 ":" ) h16 ] "::" ls32
                  / [ *5( h16 ":" ) h16 ] "::" h16
                  / [ *6( h16 ":" ) h16 ] "::"
                  ; This definition is consistent with the one for
                  ; URIs [47].

   ls32           = ( h16 ":" h16 ) / IPv4-address-literal
                  ; least-significant 32 bits of address

   h16            = 1*4HEXDIG
                  ; 16 bits of address represented in hexadecimal

4.1.4.  Order of Commands

   There are restrictions on the order in which these commands may be
   used.

   A session that will contain mail transactions MUST first be
   initialized by the use of the EHLO command.  An SMTP server SHOULD
   accept commands for non-mail transactions (e.g., VRFY, EXPN, or NOOP)
   without this initialization.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 51]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   An EHLO command MAY be issued by a client later in the session.  If
   it is issued after the session begins and the EHLO command is
   acceptable to the SMTP server, the SMTP server MUST clear all buffers
   and reset the state exactly as if a RSET command had been issued
   (specifically, it terminates any mail transaction that was in
   progress, see Section 3.3).  In other words, the sequence of RSET
   followed immediately by EHLO is redundant, but not harmful other than
   in the performance cost of executing unnecessary commands.  However
   the response to an additional EHLO command MAY be different from that
   from prior ones; the client MUST rely only on the responses from the
   most recent EHLO command.

   If the EHLO command is not acceptable to the SMTP server, 501, 500,
   502, or 550 failure replies MUST be returned as appropriate.  The
   SMTP server MUST stay in the same state after transmitting these
   replies that it was in before the EHLO was received.

   The SMTP client MUST, if possible, ensure that the domain parameter
   to the EHLO command is a primary host name as specified for this
   command in Section 2.3.5.  If this is not possible (e.g., when the
   client's address is dynamically assigned and the client does not have
   an obvious name), an address literal SHOULD be substituted for the
   domain name.

   An SMTP server MAY verify that the domain name argument in the EHLO
   command has an address record matching the IP address of the client
   by looking up the domain name and making the comparison.

   The NOOP, HELP, EXPN, VRFY, and RSET commands can be used at any time
   during a session, or without previously initializing a session.  SMTP
   servers SHOULD process these normally (that is, not return a 503
   code) even if no EHLO command has yet been received; clients SHOULD
   open a session with EHLO before sending these commands.

   If these rules are followed, the example in RFC 821 that shows "550
   access denied to you" in response to an EXPN command is incorrect
   unless an EHLO command precedes the EXPN or the denial of access is
   based on the client's IP address or other authentication or
   authorization-determining mechanisms.

   A mail transaction begins with a MAIL command and then consists of
   one or more RCPT commands, and a DATA command, in that order.  A mail
   transaction may be aborted by the RSET, a new EHLO, or the QUIT
   command.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 52]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   SMTP extensions (see Section 2.2) may create additional commands that
   initiate, abort, or end the transaction.  More generally, any new
   command MUST clearly document any effect it has on the transaction
   state.

   There may be zero or more transactions in a session.  MAIL MUST NOT
   be sent if a mail transaction is already open, i.e., it should be
   sent only if no mail transaction had been started in the session, or
   if the previous one successfully concluded with a successful DATA
   command, or if the previous one was aborted, e.g., with a RSET or new
   EHLO.

   If the transaction beginning command argument is not acceptable, a
   501 failure reply MUST be returned and the SMTP server MUST stay in
   the same state.  If the commands in a transaction are out of order to
   the degree that they cannot be processed by the server, a 503 failure
   reply MUST be returned and the SMTP server MUST stay in the same
   state.

   The last command in a session MUST be the QUIT command.  The QUIT
   command SHOULD be used by the client SMTP to request connection
   closure, even when no session opening command was sent and accepted.

4.2.  SMTP Replies

   Replies to SMTP commands serve to ensure the synchronization of
   requests and actions in the process of mail transfer and to guarantee
   that the SMTP client always knows the state of the SMTP server.
   Every command MUST generate exactly one reply.  Even the command
   pipelining extension mentioned in Section 2.1 does not change this;
   it merely allows several commands to be issued before the replies for
   each are sent together.

   The details of the command-reply sequence are described in
   Section 4.3.

   An SMTP reply consists of a three digit number (transmitted as three
   numeric characters) followed by some text unless specified otherwise
   in this document.  The number is for use by automata to determine
   what state to enter next; the text is for the human user.  The three
   digits contain enough encoded information that the SMTP client need
   not examine the text and may either discard it or pass it on to the
   user, as appropriate.  Exceptions are as noted elsewhere in this
   document.  In particular, the 220, 221, 251, 421, and 551 reply codes
   are associated with message text that must be parsed and interpreted
   by machines.  In the general case, the text may be receiver dependent
   and context dependent, so there are likely to be varying texts for
   each reply code.  A discussion of the theory of reply codes is given

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 53]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   in Section 4.2.1.  Formally, a reply is defined to be the sequence: a
   three-digit code, <SP>, one line of text, and <CRLF>, or a multiline
   reply (as defined in the same section).  Since, in violation of this
   specification, the text is sometimes not sent, clients that do not
   receive it SHOULD be prepared to process the code alone (with or
   without a trailing space character).  Only the EHLO, EXPN, and HELP
   commands are expected to result in multiline replies in normal
   circumstances; however, multiline replies are allowed for any
   command.

   In ABNF, server responses are:

   Greeting       = ( "220 " (Domain / address-literal)
                  [ SP textstring ] CRLF ) /
                  ( "220-" (Domain / address-literal)
                  [ SP textstring ] CRLF
                  *( "220-" [ textstring ] CRLF )
                  "220" [ SP textstring ] CRLF )

   textstring     = 1*(%d09 / %d32-126) ; HT, SP, Printable US-ASCII

   Reply-line     = *( Reply-code "-" [ textstring ] CRLF )
                  Reply-code [ SP textstring ] CRLF

   Reply-code     = %x32-35 %x30-35 %x30-39

   where "Greeting" appears only in the 220 response that announces that
   the server is opening its part of the connection.  (Other possible
   server responses upon connection follow the syntax of Reply-line.)

   An SMTP server SHOULD send only the reply codes listed in this
   document or additions to the list as discussed below.  An SMTP server
   SHOULD use the text shown in the examples whenever appropriate.

   // See Appendix G.26.

   An SMTP client MUST determine its actions only by the reply code, not
   by the text (except for the "change of address" 251 and 551 and, if
   necessary, 220, 221, and 421 replies); in the general case, any text,
   including no text at all (although senders SHOULD NOT send bare
   codes), MUST be acceptable.  The space (blank) following the reply
   code is considered part of the text.  A Sender-SMTP MUST first test
   the whole 3 digit reply code it receives, as well as any accompanying
   supplemental codes or information (see RFC 3463 [12] and RFC 5248
   [50]).  If the full reply code is not recognized, and the additional
   information is not recognized or missing, the Sender-SMTP MUST use
   the first digit (severity indication) of a reply code it receives.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 54]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   The list of codes that appears below MUST NOT be construed as
   permanent.  While the addition of new codes should be a rare and
   significant activity, with supplemental information in the textual
   part of the response (including enhanced status codes [12], the
   successors to that specification, and the associated registry [50])
   being preferred, new codes may be added as the result of new
   Standards or Standards-Track specifications.  Consequently, a sender-
   SMTP MUST be prepared to handle codes not specified in this document
   and MUST do so by interpreting the first digit only.

   In the absence of extensions negotiated with the client, SMTP servers
   MUST NOT send reply codes whose first digits are other than 2, 3, 4,
   or 5.  Clients that receive such out-of-range codes SHOULD normally
   treat them as fatal errors and terminate the mail transaction.

4.2.1.  Reply Code Severities and Theory

   The three digits of the reply each have a special significance.  The
   first digit denotes whether the response is good, bad, or incomplete.
   An unsophisticated SMTP client, or one that receives an unexpected
   code, will be able to determine its next action (proceed as planned,
   redo, retrench, etc.) by examining this first digit.  An SMTP client
   that wants to know approximately what kind of error occurred (e.g.,
   mail system error, command syntax error) may examine the second
   digit.  The third digit and any supplemental information that may be
   present is reserved for the finest gradation of information.

   There are four values for the first digit of the reply code:

   2yz  Positive Completion reply
      The requested action has been successfully completed.  A new
      request may be initiated.

   3yz  Positive Intermediate reply
      The command has been accepted, but the requested action is being
      held in abeyance, pending receipt of further information.  The
      SMTP client should send another command specifying this
      information.  This reply is used in command sequence groups (i.e.,
      in DATA).

   4yz  Transient Negative Completion reply
      The command was not accepted, and the requested action did not
      occur.  However, the error condition is temporary, and the action
      may be requested again.  The sender should return to the beginning
      of the command sequence (if any).  It is difficult to assign a
      meaning to "transient" when two different sites (receiver- and
      sender-SMTP agents) must agree on the interpretation.  Each reply
      in this category might have a different time value, but the SMTP

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 55]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

      client SHOULD try again.  A rule of thumb to determine whether a
      reply fits into the 4yz or the 5yz category (see below) is that
      replies are 4yz if they can be successful if repeated without any
      change in command form or in properties of the sender or receiver
      (that is, the command is repeated identically and the receiver
      does not put up a new implementation).

   5yz  Permanent Negative Completion reply
      The command was not accepted and the requested action did not
      occur.  The SMTP client SHOULD NOT repeat the exact request (in
      the same sequence).  Even some "permanent" error conditions can be
      corrected, so the human user may want to direct the SMTP client to
      reinitiate the command sequence by direct action at some point in
      the future (e.g., after the spelling has been changed, or the user
      has altered the account status).

   It is worth noting that the file transfer protocol (FTP) [19] uses a
   very similar code architecture and that the SMTP codes are based on
   the FTP model.  However, SMTP uses a one-command, one-response model
   (while FTP is asynchronous) and FTP's 1yz codes are not part of the
   SMTP model.

   The second digit encodes responses in specific categories:

   x0z  Syntax: These replies refer to syntax errors, syntactically
      correct commands that do not fit any functional category, and
      unimplemented or superfluous commands.

   x1z  Information: These are replies to requests for information, such
      as status or help.

   x2z  Connections: These are replies referring to the transmission
      channel.

   x3z  Unspecified.

   x4z  Unspecified.

   x5z  Mail system: These replies indicate the status of the receiver
      mail system vis-a-vis the requested transfer or other mail system
      action.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 56]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   The third digit gives a finer gradation of meaning in each category
   specified by the second digit.  The list of replies illustrates this.
   Each reply text is recommended rather than mandatory, and may even
   change according to the command with which it is associated.  On the
   other hand, the reply codes must strictly follow the specifications
   in this section.  Receiver implementations should not invent new
   codes for slightly different situations from the ones described here,
   but rather adapt codes already defined.

   For example, a command such as NOOP, whose successful execution does
   not offer the SMTP client any new information, will return a 250
   reply.  The reply is 502 when the command requests an unimplemented
   non-site-specific action.  A refinement of that is the 504 reply for
   a command that is implemented, but that requests an unimplemented
   parameter.

   The reply text may be longer than a single line; in these cases the
   complete text must be marked so the SMTP client knows when it can
   stop reading the reply.  This requires a special format to indicate a
   multiple line reply.

   The format for multiline replies requires that every line, except the
   last, begin with the reply code, followed immediately by a hyphen,
   "-" (also known as minus), followed by text.  The last line will
   begin with the reply code, followed immediately by <SP>, optionally
   some text, and <CRLF>.  As noted above, servers SHOULD send the <SP>
   if subsequent text is not sent, but clients MUST be prepared for it
   to be omitted.

   For example:

      250-First line
      250-Second line
      250-234 Text beginning with numbers
      250 The last line

   In a multiline reply, the reply code on each of the lines MUST be the
   same.  It is reasonable for the client to rely on this, so it can
   make processing decisions based on the code in any line, assuming
   that all others will be the same.  In a few cases, there is important
   data for the client in the reply "text".  The client will be able to
   identify these cases from the current context.

4.2.2.  Reply Codes by Function Groups

   500  Syntax error, command unrecognized (This may include errors such
      as command line too long)

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 57]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   501  Syntax error in parameters or arguments

   502  Command not implemented (see Section 4.2.4.1)

   503  Bad sequence of commands

   504  Command parameter not implemented

   211  System status, or system help reply

   214  Help message (Information on how to use the receiver or the
      meaning of a particular non-standard command; this reply is useful
      only to the human user)

   220  <domain> Service ready

   221  <domain> Service closing transmission channel

   421  <domain> Service not available, closing transmission channel
      (This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must
      shut down)

   521  <domain> No mail service here.

   556  No mail service at this domain.

   250  Requested mail action okay, completed

   251  User not local; will forward to <forward-path> (See
      Section 3.4.1)

   252  Cannot VRFY user, but will accept message and attempt delivery
      (See Section 3.5.3)

   455  Server unable to accommodate parameters

   555  MAIL FROM/RCPT TO parameters not recognized or not implemented

   450  Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable (e.g.,
      mailbox busy or temporarily blocked for policy reasons, or server
      temporarily unavailable if returned before a mail transaction is
      started)

   550  Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable (e.g., mailbox
      not found, no access, or command rejected for policy reasons)

   451  Requested action aborted: error in processing

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 58]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   551  User not local; please try <forward-path> (See Section 3.4.1)

   452  Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage
      (preferred code for "too many recipients", see Section 4.5.3.1.10)

   552  Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation.

   553  Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed (e.g.,
      mailbox syntax incorrect).  This code is also used as an
      "ambiguous mailbox" response to VRFY, see Section 3.5.1.

   354  Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>

   554  Transaction failed (Or, historically in the case of a
      connection-opening response, "No SMTP service here".  521 is now
      preferred for that function at connection-opening if the server
      never accepts mail.)

4.2.3.  Reply Codes in Numeric Order

   211  System status, or system help reply

   214  Help message (Information on how to use the receiver or the
      meaning of a particular non-standard command; this reply is useful
      only to the human user)

   220  <domain> Service ready

   221  <domain> Service closing transmission channel

   250  Requested mail action okay, completed

   251  User not local; will forward to <forward-path> (See
      Section 3.4.1)

   252  Cannot VRFY user, but will accept message and attempt delivery
      (See Section 3.5.3)

   354  Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>

   421  <domain> Service not available, closing transmission channel
      (This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must
      shut down)

   450  Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable (e.g.,
      mailbox busy or temporarily blocked for policy reasons, or server
      temporarily unavailable if returned before a mail transaction is
      started)

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 59]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   451  Requested action aborted: local error in processing

   452  Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage (also
      preferred code for "too many recipients", see Section 4.5.3.1.10)

   455  Server unable to accommodate parameters

   500  Syntax error, command unrecognized (This may include errors such
      as command line too long)

   501  Syntax error in parameters or arguments

   502  Command not implemented (see Section 4.2.4.1)

   503  Bad sequence of commands

   504  Command parameter not implemented

   521  No mail service (See Section 4.2.4.2.)

   550  Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable (e.g., mailbox
      not found, no access, or command rejected for policy reasons)

   551  User not local; please try <forward-path> (See Section 3.4.1)

   552  Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation.

   553  Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed (e.g.,
      mailbox syntax incorrect).  This code is also used as an
      "ambiguous mailbox" response to VRFY, see Section 3.5.1.

   554  Transaction failed (Or, in the case of a connection-opening
      response, "No SMTP service here" although 521 is now preferred for
      the latter.  See Section 4.2.4.2.)

   555  MAIL FROM/RCPT TO parameters not recognized or not implemented

   556  No mail service at this domain.  (See Section 4.2.4.2.)

4.2.4.  Some specific code situations and relationships

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 60]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

4.2.4.1.  Reply Code 502

   Questions have been raised as to when reply code 502 (Command not
   implemented) SHOULD be returned in preference to other codes.  502
   SHOULD be used when the command is actually recognized by the SMTP
   server, but not implemented.  If the command is not recognized, code
   500 SHOULD be returned.  Extended SMTP systems MUST NOT list
   capabilities in response to EHLO for which they will return 502 (or
   500) replies.

4.2.4.2.  "No mail accepted" situations and the 521, 554, 556, and 450
          codes

   Codes 521, 554, and 556 are all used to report different types of
   permanent "no mail accepted" situations.  They differ as follows.
   521 is an indication from a system answering on the SMTP port that it
   does not support SMTP service (a so-called "dummy server" as
   discussed in RFC 7504 [52] and elsewhere).  Obviously, it requires
   that system exist and that a connection can be made successfully to
   it.  Because a system that does not accept any mail cannot
   meaningfully accept a RCPT command, any commands (other than QUIT)
   issued after an SMTP server has issued a 521 reply are client
   (sender) errors.

   When a domain does not intend to accept mail and wishes to publish
   that fact rather than being subjected to connection attempts, the
   best way to accomplish that is to use the "Null MX" convention.  This
   is done by advertising a single MX RR (see Section 3.3.9 of RFC 1035
   [7]) with an RDATA section consisting of preference number 0 and a
   zero-length label, written in master files as ".", as the exchange
   domain, to denote that there exists no mail exchanger for that
   domain.  Reply code 556 is then used by a message submission or
   intermediate SMTP system (see Section 1.1) to report that it cannot
   forward the message further because it knows from the DNS entry that
   the recipient domain does not accept mail.  If, despite publishing
   the DNS entry, the host associated with the server domain chooses to
   respond on the SMTP port, it SHOULD respond with the 556 code as
   well.  The details of the Null MX convention were first defined in
   RFC 7505 [53]; see that document for additional discussion of the
   rationale for that convention.

   Reply code 556 would normally be used in response to a RCPT command
   (or extension command with similar intent) when the SMTP system
   identifies a domain that it can (or has) determined never accepts
   mail.  Other codes, including 554 and the temporary 450, are used for
   more transient situations and situations in which an SMTP server
   cannot or will not deliver to (or accept mail for) a particular
   system or mailbox for policy reasons rather than ones directly

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 61]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   related to SMTP processing.  The 450 code may also be used to reflect
   a server being temporarily unavailable at connection type or after
   the EHLO command is issued (i.e., before a mail transaction is
   initiated).

4.2.4.3.  Reply Codes after DATA and the Subsequent <CRLF>.<CRLF>

   When an SMTP server returns a positive completion status (2yz code)
   after the DATA command is completed with <CRLF>.<CRLF>, it accepts
   responsibility for:

   *  delivering the message (if the recipient mailbox exists), or

   *  if attempts to deliver the message fail due to transient
      conditions, retrying delivery some reasonable number of times at
      intervals as specified in Section 4.5.4.

   *  if attempts to deliver the message fail due to permanent
      conditions, or if repeated attempts to deliver the message fail
      due to transient conditions, returning appropriate notification to
      the sender of the original message (using the address in the SMTP
      MAIL command).

   When an SMTP server returns a temporary error status (4yz) code after
   the DATA command is completed with <CRLF>.<CRLF>, it MUST NOT make a
   subsequent attempt to deliver that message.  The SMTP client retains
   responsibility for the delivery of that message and may either return
   it to the user or requeue it for a subsequent attempt (see
   Section 4.5.4.1).

   The user who originated the message SHOULD be able to interpret the
   return of a transient failure status (by mail message or otherwise)
   as a non-delivery indication, just as a permanent failure would be
   interpreted.  If the client SMTP successfully handles these
   conditions, the user will not receive such a reply.

   // See Appendix G.27.  Proposed text:
   // An SMTP response indicating a transient failure status SHOULD
   // contain text providing a simple explanation, indicating that
   // delivery of the message is delayed.

   When an SMTP server returns a permanent error status (5yz) code after
   the DATA command is completed with <CRLF>.<CRLF>, it MUST NOT make
   any subsequent attempt to deliver the message.  As with temporary
   error status codes, the SMTP client retains responsibility for the
   message, but SHOULD NOT again attempt delivery to the same server
   without user review of the message and response and appropriate
   intervention.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 62]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

4.3.  Sequencing of Commands and Replies

4.3.1.  Sequencing Overview

   The communication between the sender and receiver is an alternating
   dialogue, controlled by the sender.  As such, the sender issues a
   command and the receiver responds with a reply.  Unless other
   arrangements are negotiated through service extensions, the sender
   MUST wait for this response before sending further commands.  One
   important reply is the connection greeting.  Normally, a receiver
   will send a 220 "Service ready" reply when the connection is
   completed.  The sender SHOULD wait for this greeting message before
   sending any commands.

   Note: all the greeting-type replies have the official name (the
   fully-qualified primary domain name) of the server host as the first
   word following the reply code.  Sometimes the host will have no
   meaningful name.  See Section 4.1.3 for a discussion of alternatives
   in these situations.

   For example,

      220 ISIF.USC.EDU Service ready

   or

      220 mail.example.com SuperSMTP v 6.1.2 Service ready

   or

      220 [10.0.0.1] Clueless host service ready

   The table below lists alternative success and failure replies for
   each command.  These SHOULD be strictly adhered to.  A receiver MAY
   substitute text in the replies, but the meanings and actions implied
   by the code numbers and by the specific command reply sequence MUST
   be preserved.  However, in order to provide robustness as SMTP is
   extended and evolves, the discussion in Section 4.2.1 still applies:
   all SMTP clients MUST be prepared to accept any code that conforms to
   the discussion in that section and MUST be prepared to interpret it
   on the basis of its first digit only.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 63]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

4.3.2.  Command-Reply Sequences

   Each command is listed with its usual possible replies.  The prefixes
   used before the possible replies are "I" for intermediate, "S" for
   success, and "E" for error.  Since some servers may generate other
   replies under special circumstances, and to allow for future
   extension, SMTP clients SHOULD, when possible, interpret only the
   first digit of the reply and MUST be prepared to deal with
   unrecognized reply codes by interpreting the first digit only.
   Unless extended using the mechanisms described in Section 2.2, SMTP
   servers MUST NOT transmit reply codes to an SMTP client that are
   other than three digits or that do not start in a digit between 2 and
   5 inclusive.

   These sequencing rules and, in principle, the codes themselves, can
   be extended or modified by SMTP extensions offered by the server and
   accepted (requested) by the client.  However, if the target is more
   precise granularity in the codes, rather than codes for completely
   new purposes, the system described in RFC 3463 [12] SHOULD be used in
   preference to the invention of new codes.

   In addition to the codes listed below, any SMTP command can return
   any of the following codes if the corresponding unusual circumstances
   are encountered:

   500  For the "command line too long" case or if the command name was
      not recognized.  Note that producing a "command not recognized"
      error in response to the required subset of these commands is a
      violation of this specification.  Similarly, producing a "command
      too long" message for a command line shorter than 512 characters
      would violate the provisions of Section 4.5.3.1.4.

   501  Syntax error in command or arguments.  In order to provide for
      future extensions, commands that are specified in this document as
      not accepting arguments (DATA, RSET, QUIT) SHOULD return a 501
      message if arguments are supplied in the absence of EHLO-
      advertised extensions.

   421  Service shutting down and closing transmission channel

   Specific sequences are:

      CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT

      -  S: 220
         E: 521, 554, 556, 450 (if the system receiving the connection
         attempt is able to answer but is temporarily not available to
         receive email)

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 64]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

      EHLO or HELO

      -  S: 250
         E: 504 (a conforming implementation could return this code only
         in fairly obscure cases), 550, 502 (permitted only with an old-
         style server that does not support EHLO), 450 (see note above)

      MAIL

      -  S: 250
         E: 552, 451, 452, 550, 553, 503, 455, 555

      RCPT

      -  S: 250, 251 (but see Section 3.4.1 for discussion of 251 and
         551)
         E: 550, 551, 552 (obsolete for "too many recipients; see
         Section 4.5.3.1.10), 553, 450, 451, 452, 503, 455, 555

      DATA

      -  I: 354 -> data -> S: 250

         o  E: 552, 554, 451, 452

         o  E: 450, 550 (rejections for policy reasons)

      -  E: 503, 554

      RSET

      -  S: 250

      VRFY

      -  S: 250, 251, 252
         E: 550, 551, 553, 502, 504

      EXPN

      -  S: 250, 252
         E: 550, 500, 502, 504

      HELP

      -  S: 211, 214
         E: 502, 504

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 65]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

      NOOP

      -  S: 250

      QUIT

      -  S: 221

4.4.  Trace Information

   When inserted by SMTP, trace information is used to provide an audit
   trail of message handling.  In addition, it indicates a route back to
   the sender of the message.

4.4.1.  Received Header Field (Time Stamp)

   When an SMTP server receives a message for delivery or further
   processing, it MUST insert trace (often referred to as "time stamp"
   or "Received" information) at the beginning of the message content,
   as discussed in Section 4.1.1.4.

   This line MUST be structured as follows:

   *  The FROM clause, which MUST be supplied in an SMTP environment,
      SHOULD contain both (1) the name of the source host as presented
      in the EHLO command and (2) an address literal containing the IP
      address of the source, determined from the TCP connection.

   *  The ID clause MAY contain an "@" as suggested in the Internet
      Message format specification [16], but this is not required.

   *  If the FOR clause appears, it MUST contain exactly one <path>
      entry, even when multiple RCPT commands have been given.  Multiple
      <path>s raise some security issues and have been deprecated, see
      Section 7.2.

   An Internet mail program MUST NOT change or delete a Received: line
   that was previously added to the message header section.  SMTP
   servers MUST prepend Received lines to messages; they MUST NOT change
   the order of existing lines or insert Received lines in any other
   location.

   As the Internet grows, comparability of Received header fields is
   important for detecting problems, especially slow relays.  SMTP
   servers that create Received header fields SHOULD use explicit
   offsets in the dates (e.g., -0800), rather than time zone names of
   any type.  Local time (with an offset) SHOULD be used rather than UTC
   when feasible.  This formulation allows slightly more information

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 66]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   about local circumstances to be specified.  If UTC is needed, the
   receiver need merely do some simple arithmetic to convert the values.
   Use of UTC loses information about the time zone-location of the
   server.  If it is desired to supply a time zone name, it SHOULD be
   included in a comment.  If UTC is actually being supplied instead of
   the local time zone, it should be denoted by a time zone offset of
   "-0000".  Time zones aligned with the prime meridian (e.g., "GMT")
   are shown as "+0000".

4.4.2.  Return-path Header Field

   When the delivery SMTP server makes the "final delivery" of a
   message, it MUST insert a return-path line at the beginning of the
   mail data.  Here, final delivery means the message has left the SMTP
   environment.  Normally, this would mean it had been delivered to the
   destination user or an associated mail drop, but in some cases it may
   be further processed and transmitted by another mail system.

   It is possible for the mailbox in the return path to be different
   from the actual sender's mailbox, for example, if error responses are
   to be delivered to a special error handling mailbox rather than to
   the message sender.  When mailing lists are involved, this
   arrangement is common and useful as a means of directing errors to
   the list maintainer rather than the message originator.

   A message-originating SMTP system SHOULD NOT send a message that
   already contains a Return-path header field.  SMTP servers performing
   a relay function MUST NOT inspect the message data, and especially
   not to the extent needed to determine if Return-path header fields
   are present.  SMTP servers making final delivery MAY remove Return-
   path header fields before adding their own.

   The primary purpose of the Return-path is to designate the address to
   which messages indicating non-delivery or other mail system failures
   are to be sent.  For this to be unambiguous, exactly one return path
   SHOULD be present when the message is delivered.  Systems using the
   syntax specified here with non-SMTP transports SHOULD designate an
   unambiguous address, associated with the transport envelope, to which
   error reports (e.g., non-delivery messages) should be sent.

   It is sometimes difficult for an SMTP server to determine whether or
   not it is making final delivery since forwarding or other operations
   may occur after the message is accepted for delivery.  Consequently,
   any further (forwarding, gateway, or relay) systems MAY remove the
   return path and rebuild the MAIL command as needed to ensure that
   exactly one such line appears in a delivered message.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 67]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

4.4.3.  Return-path, Non-SMTP Systems, and Gateways

   When SMTP systems, especially relay ones that are receiving messages
   and then processing them for the next hop, special issues arise and
   care must be taken.  In particular:

   *  a gateway from SMTP -> elsewhere SHOULD insert a return-path
      header field, unless it is known that the "elsewhere" transport
      also uses Internet domain addresses and maintains the envelope
      sender address separately.

   *  a gateway from elsewhere -> SMTP SHOULD delete any return-path
      header field present in the message, and either copy that
      information to the SMTP envelope or combine it with information
      present in the envelope of the other transport system to construct
      the reverse-path argument to the MAIL command in the SMTP
      envelope.

   The server must give special treatment to cases in which processing
   following the end of mail data indication is only partially
   successful.  This could happen if, after accepting several recipients
   and the mail data, the SMTP server finds that the mail data could be
   successfully delivered to some, but not all, of the recipients.  In
   such cases, the response to the DATA command MUST be an OK reply.
   However, the SMTP server MUST compose and send an "undeliverable
   mail" notification message to the originator of the message.

4.4.4.  Additional Trace Fields

   "Received" and "Return-path", defined above, are the only two trace
   fields that are part of SMTP.  Additional trace fields, or variations
   on the definitions here for other mail transports, may be defined and
   registered as described in [I-D.ietf-emailcore-rfc5322bis].

4.4.5.  Trace Information Summary and Analysis

   The text above implies that the final mail data will begin with a
   return path line, followed by one or more time stamp lines.  These
   lines will be followed by the rest of the mail data: first the
   balance of the mail header section and then the body (RFC 5322bis
   [16]).

   The time stamp line and the return path line are formally defined as
   follows (the definitions for "FWS" and "CFWS" appear in RFC 5322bis
   [16]):

   Return-path-line  = "Return-Path:" FWS Reverse-path <CRLF>

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 68]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Time-stamp-line  = "Received:" FWS Stamp <CRLF>

   Stamp          = From-domain By-domain Opt-info [CFWS] ";"
                  FWS date-time
                  ; where "date-time" is as defined in RFC5322bis [16]
                  ; but the "obs-" forms, especially two-digit
                  ; years, are prohibited in SMTP and MUST NOT be used.

   From-domain    = "FROM" FWS Extended-Domain

   By-domain      = CFWS "BY" FWS Extended-Domain

   Extended-Domain  = Domain /
                  ( Domain FWS "(" TCP-info ")" ) /
                  ( address-literal FWS "(" TCP-info ")" )

   TCP-info       = address-literal / ( Domain FWS address-literal )
                  ; Information derived by server from TCP connection
                  ; not client EHLO.

   Opt-info       = [Via] [With] [ID] [For]
                  [Additional-Registered-Clauses]

   Via            = CFWS "VIA" FWS Link

   With           = CFWS "WITH" FWS Protocol

   ID             = CFWS "ID" FWS ( Atom / msg-id )
                  ; msg-id is defined in RFC 5322bis [16]

   For            = CFWS "FOR" FWS ( Path / Mailbox )

   Additional-Registered-Clauses  = 1*(CFWS Atom FWS String)
                  ; See Section 8.1.4.

   Link           = "TCP" / Addtl-Link

   Addtl-Link     = Atom
                  ; Additional standard names for links are
                  ; registered with the Internet Assigned Numbers
                  ; Authority (IANA).  "Via" is primarily of value
                  ; with non-Internet transports.  SMTP servers
                  ; SHOULD NOT use unregistered names.

   Protocol       = "ESMTP" / "SMTP" / Attdl-Protocol

   Addtl-Protocol  = Atom

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 69]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

                  ; Additional standard names for protocols are
                  ; registered with the Internet Assigned Numbers
                  ; Authority (IANA) in the "mail parameters"
                  ; registry [13].  SMTP servers SHOULD NOT
                  ; use unregistered names.

4.5.  Additional Implementation Issues

4.5.1.  Minimum Implementation

   In order to make SMTP workable, the following minimum implementation
   MUST be provided by all receivers.  The following commands MUST be
   supported to conform to this specification:

      EHLO
      HELO
      MAIL
      RCPT
      DATA
      RSET
      NOOP
      QUIT
      VRFY

   Any system that includes an SMTP server supporting mail relaying or
   delivery MUST support the reserved mailbox "postmaster" as a case-
   insensitive local name.  This postmaster address is not strictly
   necessary if the server always returns 554 on connection opening (as
   described in Section 3.1).  The requirement to accept mail for
   postmaster implies that RCPT commands that specify a mailbox for
   postmaster at any of the domains for which the SMTP server provides
   mail service, as well as the special case of "RCPT TO:<Postmaster>"
   (with no domain specification), MUST be supported.

   SMTP systems are expected to make every reasonable effort to accept
   mail directed to Postmaster from any other system on the Internet.
   In extreme cases -- such as to contain a denial of service attack or
   other breach of security -- an SMTP server may block mail directed to
   Postmaster.  However, such arrangements SHOULD be narrowly tailored
   so as to avoid blocking messages that are not part of such attacks.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 70]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

4.5.2.  Transparency

   Without some provision for data transparency, the character sequence
   "<CRLF>.<CRLF>" ends the mail text and cannot be sent by the user.
   In general, users are not aware of such "forbidden" sequences.  To
   allow all user composed text to be transmitted transparently, the
   following procedures are used:

   *  Before sending a line of mail text, the SMTP client checks the
      first character of the line.  If it is a period, one additional
      period is inserted at the beginning of the line.

   *  When a line of mail text is received by the SMTP server, it checks
      the line.  If the line is composed of a single period, it is
      treated as the end of mail indicator.  If the first character is a
      period and there are other characters on the line, the first
      character is deleted.

   The mail data may contain any of the 128 ASCII characters.  All
   characters are to be delivered to the recipient's mailbox, including
   spaces, vertical and horizontal tabs, and other control characters.
   If the transmission channel provides an 8-bit byte (octet) data
   stream, the 7-bit ASCII codes are transmitted, right justified, in
   the octets, with the high-order bits cleared to zero.

   In some systems, it may be necessary to transform the data as it is
   received and stored.  This may be necessary for hosts that use a
   different character set than ASCII as their local character set, that
   store data in records rather than strings, or which use special
   character sequences as delimiters inside mailboxes.  If such
   transformations are necessary, they MUST be reversible, especially if
   they are applied to mail being relayed.

4.5.3.  Sizes and Timeouts

4.5.3.1.  Size Limits and Minimums

   There are several objects that have required minimum/maximum sizes.
   Every implementation MUST be able to receive objects of at least
   these sizes.  Objects larger than these sizes SHOULD be avoided when
   possible.  However, some Internet mail constructs such as encoded
   X.400 addresses (RFC 2156 [32]) will often require larger objects.
   Clients MAY attempt to transmit these, but MUST be prepared for a
   server to reject them if they cannot be handled by it.  To the
   maximum extent possible, implementation techniques that impose no
   limits on the length of these objects should be used.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 71]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Extensions to SMTP may involve the use of characters that occupy more
   than a single octet each.  This section therefore specifies lengths
   in octets where absolute lengths, rather than character counts, are
   intended.

4.5.3.1.1.  Local-part

   The maximum total length of a user name or other local-part is 64
   octets.

4.5.3.1.2.  Domain

   The maximum total length of a domain name or number is 255 octets.

4.5.3.1.3.  Path

   The maximum total length of a reverse-path or forward-path is 256
   octets (including the punctuation and element separators).

4.5.3.1.4.  Command Line

   The maximum total length of a command line including the command word
   and the <CRLF> is 512 octets.  SMTP extensions may be used to
   increase this limit.

4.5.3.1.5.  Reply Line

   The maximum total length of a reply line including the reply code and
   the <CRLF> is 512 octets.  More information may be conveyed through
   multiple-line replies.

4.5.3.1.6.  Text Line

   The maximum total length of a text line including the <CRLF> is 1000
   octets (not counting the leading dot duplicated for transparency).
   This number may be increased by the use of SMTP Service Extensions.

4.5.3.1.7.  Message Content

   The maximum total length of a message content (including any message
   header section as well as the message body) MUST BE at least 64K
   octets.  Since the introduction of Internet Standards for multimedia
   mail (RFC 2045 [30]), message lengths on the Internet have grown
   dramatically, and message size restrictions should be avoided if at
   all possible.  SMTP server systems that must impose restrictions
   SHOULD implement the "SIZE" service extension of RFC 1870 [11], and
   SMTP client systems that will send large messages SHOULD utilize it
   when possible.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 72]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

4.5.3.1.8.  Recipient Buffer

   The minimum total number of recipients that MUST be buffered is 100
   recipients.  Rejection of messages (for excessive recipients) with
   fewer than 100 RCPT commands is a violation of this specification.
   The general principle that relaying SMTP server MUST NOT, and
   delivery SMTP servers SHOULD NOT, perform validation tests on message
   header fields suggests that messages SHOULD NOT be rejected based on
   the total number of recipients shown in header fields.  A server that
   imposes a limit on the number of recipients MUST behave in an orderly
   fashion, such as rejecting additional addresses over its limit rather
   than silently discarding addresses previously accepted.  A client
   that needs to deliver a message containing over 100 RCPT commands
   SHOULD be prepared to transmit in 100-recipient "chunks" if the
   server declines to accept more than 100 recipients in a single
   message.

4.5.3.1.9.  Treatment When Limits Exceeded

   Errors due to exceeding these limits may be reported by using the
   reply codes.  Some examples of reply codes are:

      500 Line too long.

   or

      501 Path too long

   or

      452 Too many recipients (see below)

   or

      552 Too much mail data (historically also used for too many
      recipients (see below).

4.5.3.1.10.  Too Many Recipients Code

   RFC 821 [6] incorrectly listed the error where an SMTP server
   exhausts its implementation limit on the number of RCPT commands
   ("too many recipients") as having reply code 552.  The correct reply
   code for this condition is 452.  At the time RFC 5321 was written,
   the use of response code 552 by servers was sufficiently common that
   client implementation were advised to simply treat it as if 452 had
   been sent.  That advice is no longer necessary or useful.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 73]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   When a conforming SMTP server encounters this condition, it has at
   least 100 successful RCPT commands in its recipient buffer.  If the
   server is able to accept the message, then at least these 100
   addresses will be removed from the SMTP client's queue.  When the
   client attempts retransmission of those addresses that received 452
   responses, at least 100 of these will be able to fit in the SMTP
   server's recipient buffer.  Each retransmission attempt that is able
   to deliver anything will be able to dispose of at least 100 of these
   recipients.

   If an SMTP server has an implementation limit on the number of RCPT
   commands and this limit is exhausted, it MUST use a response code of
   452.  If the server has a configured site-policy limitation on the
   number of RCPT commands, it MAY instead use a 5yz response code.  In
   particular, if the intent is to prohibit messages with more than a
   site-specified number of recipients, rather than merely limit the
   number of recipients in a given mail transaction, it would be
   reasonable to return a 503 response to any DATA command received
   subsequent to the 452 code or to simply return the 503 after DATA
   without returning any previous negative response.

4.5.3.2.  Timeouts

   An SMTP client MUST provide a timeout mechanism.  It MUST use per-
   command timeouts rather than somehow trying to time the entire mail
   transaction.  Timeouts SHOULD be easily reconfigurable, preferably
   without recompiling the SMTP code.  To implement this, a timer is set
   for each SMTP command and for each buffer of the data transfer.  The
   latter means that the overall timeout is inherently proportional to
   the size of the message.

   Based on extensive experience with busy mail-relay hosts, the minimum
   per-command timeout values SHOULD be as follows:

4.5.3.2.1.  Initial 220 Message: 5 Minutes

   An SMTP client process needs to distinguish between a failed TCP
   connection and a delay in receiving the initial 220 greeting message.
   Many SMTP servers accept a TCP connection but delay delivery of the
   220 message until their system load permits more mail to be
   processed.

4.5.3.2.2.  MAIL Command: 5 Minutes

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 74]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

4.5.3.2.3.  RCPT Command: 5 Minutes

   A longer timeout is required if processing of mailing lists and
   aliases is not deferred until after the message was accepted.

4.5.3.2.4.  DATA Initiation: 2 Minutes

   This is while awaiting the "354 Start Input" reply to a DATA command.

4.5.3.2.5.  Data Block: 3 Minutes

   This is while awaiting the completion of each TCP SEND call
   transmitting a chunk of data.

4.5.3.2.6.  DATA Termination: 10 Minutes.

   This is while awaiting the "250 OK" reply.  When the receiver gets
   the final period terminating the message data, it typically performs
   processing to deliver the message to a user mailbox.  A spurious
   timeout at this point would be very wasteful and would typically
   result in delivery of multiple copies of the message, since it has
   been successfully sent and the server has accepted responsibility for
   delivery.  See Section 6.1 for additional discussion.

4.5.3.2.7.  Server Timeout: 5 Minutes.

   An SMTP server SHOULD have a timeout of at least 5 minutes while it
   is awaiting the next command from the sender.

4.5.4.  Retry Strategies

   The common structure of a host SMTP implementation includes user
   mailboxes, one or more areas for queuing messages in transit, and one
   or more daemon processes for sending and receiving mail.  The exact
   structure will vary depending on the needs of the users on the host
   and the number and size of mailing lists supported by the host.  We
   describe several optimizations that have proved helpful, particularly
   for mailers supporting high traffic levels.

   Any queuing strategy MUST include timeouts on all activities on a
   per-command basis.  A queuing strategy MUST NOT send error messages
   in response to error messages under any circumstances.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 75]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

4.5.4.1.  Sending Strategy

   The general model for an SMTP client is one or more processes that
   periodically attempt to transmit outgoing mail.  In a typical system,
   the program that composes a message has some method for requesting
   immediate attention for a new piece of outgoing mail, while mail that
   cannot be transmitted immediately MUST be queued and periodically
   retried by the sender.  A mail queue entry will include not only the
   message itself but also the envelope information.

   The sender MUST delay retrying a particular destination after one
   attempt has failed.  In general, the retry interval SHOULD be at
   least 30 minutes; however, more sophisticated and variable strategies
   will be beneficial when the SMTP client can determine the reason for
   non-delivery.

   Retries continue until the message is transmitted or the sender gives
   up; the give-up time generally needs to be at least 4-5 days.  It MAY
   be appropriate to set a shorter maximum number of retries for non-
   delivery notifications and equivalent error messages than for
   standard messages.  The parameters to the retry algorithm MUST be
   configurable.

   A client SHOULD keep a list of hosts it cannot reach and
   corresponding connection timeouts, rather than just retrying queued
   mail items.

   Experience suggests that failures are typically transient (the target
   system or its connection has crashed), favoring a policy of two
   connection attempts in the first hour the message is in the queue,
   and then backing off to one every two or three hours.

   The SMTP client can shorten the queuing delay in cooperation with the
   SMTP server.  For example, if mail is received from a particular
   address, it is likely that mail queued for that host can now be sent.
   Application of this principle may, in many cases, eliminate the
   requirement for an explicit "send queues now" function such as ETRN,
   RFC 1985 [29].

   The strategy may be further modified as a result of multiple
   addresses per host (see below) to optimize delivery time versus
   resource usage.

   An SMTP client may have a large queue of messages for each
   unavailable destination host.  If all of these messages were retried
   in every retry cycle, there would be excessive Internet overhead and
   the sending system would be blocked for a long period.  Note that an
   SMTP client can generally determine that a delivery attempt has

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 76]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   failed only after a timeout of several minutes, and even a one-minute
   timeout per connection will result in a very large delay if retries
   are repeated for dozens, or even hundreds, of queued messages to the
   same host.

   At the same time, SMTP clients SHOULD use great care in caching
   negative responses from servers.  In an extreme case, if EHLO is
   issued multiple times during the same SMTP connection, different
   answers may be returned by the server.  More significantly, 5yz
   responses to the MAIL command MUST NOT be cached.

   When a mail message is to be delivered to multiple recipients, and
   the SMTP server to which a copy of the message is to be sent is the
   same for multiple recipients, then only one copy of the message
   SHOULD be transmitted.  That is, the SMTP client SHOULD use the
   command sequence: MAIL, RCPT, RCPT, ..., RCPT, DATA instead of the
   sequence: MAIL, RCPT, DATA, ..., MAIL, RCPT, DATA.  However, if there
   are very many addresses, a limit on the number of RCPT commands per
   MAIL command MAY be imposed.  This efficiency feature SHOULD be
   implemented.

   Similarly, to achieve timely delivery, the SMTP client MAY support
   multiple concurrent outgoing mail transactions.  However, some limit
   may be appropriate to protect the host from devoting all its
   resources to mail.

4.5.4.2.  Receiving Strategy

   The SMTP server SHOULD attempt to keep a pending listen on the SMTP
   port (specified by IANA as port 25) at all times.  This requires the
   support of multiple incoming TCP connections for SMTP.  Some limit
   MAY be imposed, but servers that cannot handle more than one SMTP
   transaction at a time are not in conformance with the intent of this
   specification.

   As discussed above, when the SMTP server receives mail from a
   particular host address, it could activate its own SMTP queuing
   mechanisms to retry any mail pending for that host address.

4.5.5.  Messages with a Null Reverse-Path

   There are several types of notification messages that are required by
   existing and proposed Standards to be sent with a null reverse-path,
   namely non-delivery notifications as discussed in Section 3.6.1 and
   Section 3.6.2, other kinds of Delivery Status Notifications (DSNs,
   RFC 3461 [39]), and Message Disposition Notifications (MDNs, RFC 8098
   [44]).  All of these kinds of messages are notifications about a
   previous message, and they are sent to the reverse-path of the

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 77]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   previous mail message.  (If the delivery of such a notification
   message fails, that usually indicates a problem with the mail system
   of the host to which the notification message is addressed.  For this
   reason, at some hosts the MTA is set up to forward such failed
   notification messages to someone who is able to fix problems with the
   mail system, e.g., via the postmaster alias.)

   All other types of messages (i.e., any message which is not required
   by a Standards-Track RFC to have a null reverse-path) SHOULD be sent
   with a valid, non-null reverse-path.

   Implementers of automated email processors should be careful to make
   sure that the various kinds of messages with a null reverse-path are
   handled correctly.  In particular, such systems SHOULD NOT reply to
   messages with a null reverse-path, and they SHOULD NOT add a non-null
   reverse-path, or change a null reverse-path to a non-null one, to
   such messages when forwarding.

5.  Address Resolution and Mail Handling

5.1.  Locating the Target Host

   Unless special circumstances exist as described in Section 3.3, once
   an SMTP client lexically identifies a domain to which mail will be
   delivered for processing (as described in Sections 2.3.5 and 3.6), a
   DNS lookup MUST be performed to resolve the domain name as specified
   in RFC 1035 [7] and RFC 1123 Section 5.3.5 [10]).  The names are
   required to be fully-qualified domain names (FQDNs) as discussed in
   Section 2.3.5.

   The lookup first attempts to locate an MX record associated with the
   name.  If a CNAME record is found, the resulting name is processed as
   if it were the initial name.  If a non-existent domain error is
   returned, this situation MUST be reported as an error.  If a
   temporary error is returned, the message MUST be queued and retried
   later (see Section 4.5.4.1).  If an empty list of MXs is returned,
   the address is treated as if it was associated with an implicit MX RR
   with a preference of 0, pointing to that host.  If MX records are
   present, but none of them are usable, or the implicit MX is unusable,
   this situation MUST be reported as an error.

   When the lookup succeeds, the mapping can result in a list of
   alternative delivery addresses rather than a single address.  This
   can be due to multiple MX records, multihoming, or both.  To provide
   reliable mail transmission, the SMTP client MUST be able to try (and
   be prepared to retry) each of the relevant addresses in this list in
   order (see below), until a delivery attempt succeeds.  However, as
   discussed more generally in Section 7.8 there MAY also be a

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 78]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   configurable limit on the number of alternate addresses that can be
   tried.  In any case, the SMTP client SHOULD try at least two
   addresses.

   If one or more MX RRs are found for a given name, SMTP systems MUST
   NOT utilize any address RRs associated with that name unless they are
   located using the MX RRs; the "implicit MX" rule above applies only
   if there are no MX records present.  If MX records are present, but
   none of them are usable, this situation MUST be reported as an error.
   That domain name also MUST be a primary host name, i.e., it is not
   allowed to be an alias.

   When a domain name associated with an MX RR is looked up and the
   associated data field obtained, the data field of that response MUST
   contain a domain name that conforms to the specifications of
   Section 2.3.5.  That domain name, when queried, MUST return at least
   one address record (e.g., A or AAAA RR) that gives the IP address of
   the SMTP server to which the message should be directed.  Any other
   response, specifically including a value that will return a CNAME
   record when queried, lies outside the scope of this Standard.  The
   prohibition on labels in the data that resolve to CNAMEs is discussed
   in more detail in RFC 2181, Section 10.3 [33].

   Two types of information are used to rank the host addresses:
   multiple MX records, and multihomed hosts.

   MX records contain a numerical preference indication that MUST be
   used in sorting if more than one such record appears.  Lower numbers
   are more preferred than higher ones.  The sender-SMTP MUST inspect
   the list for any of the names or addresses by which it might be known
   in mail transactions.  If a matching record is found, all records at
   that preference level and higher-numbered ones MUST be discarded from
   consideration.  If there are no records left at that point, it is an
   error condition, and a 5yz reply code generated (terminating the mail
   transaction) or the message MUST be returned as undeliverable.  If
   there is a single MX record at the most-preferred preference label,
   the data field associated with that record is used as the next
   destination.  Otherwise, if there are multiple records with the same
   preference and there is no clear reason to favor one (e.g., by
   recognition of an easily reached address), then the sender-SMTP MUST
   randomize them to spread the load across multiple mail exchangers for
   a specific organization.

   // There are (or may be) some issues with the next paragraph, text
   // that dates from RFC 2821 or earlier.  See just after it.
   The destination host (from either the data field of the preferred MX
   record or from an address record found in an implicit MX) may be

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 79]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   multihomed.  In those cases the domain name resolver will return a
   list of alternative IP addresses.  It is the responsibility of the
   domain name resolver interface to have ordered this list by
   decreasing preference if necessary, and the SMTP sender MUST try them
   in the order presented.

   // John Levine has some concerns about the above paragraph.  I hope
   // this summary is correct, but he suggests that the whole case is
   // rare, partially because multihoming in the traditional sense is
   // far less common than before connectivity got as complicated
   // (firewalls, NATs, etc.) as it is today.  Today, the dominant case
   // of a host having more than one address facing the public Internet
   // involves having one IPv4 address and one IPv6 address.  On the
   // other hand, multiple addresses for a single domain name (not a
   // single host) is common as a way to support load balancing.  If we
   // were to go back to the last half of the 1980s, I think load
   // balancing for mail would have been specified, not by giving
   // different physical hosts the same name, but by giving them
   // different names and using MX records with the same preference
   // level.  We don't need to address that distinction and should
   // probably avoid trying to do so.  John suggests dealing with the
   // problem by replacing all (or most) of the paragraph above with the
   // following:
   When hosts have multiple A and/or AAAA records, DNS servers often
   return randomized or subset results to aid load balancing, so clients
   SHOULD use the records in the order returned.

   // It seems to me that we can: (i) ignore the problem (or decide
   // there really isn't one) and stick with the existing text. (ii)
   // Discard the original text and replace it with John's proposed text
   // or some variation on it.  (iii) Come up with some hybrid of, or
   // variation on, both versions, perhaps talking explicitly about
   // multihoming and load balancing.  Unless we pick (i), we should all
   // understand that the MUST of the original is being dropped to a
   // SHOULD and see if we are ok with that.  What is the WG's pleasure?

   Although the capability to try multiple alternative addresses is
   required, specific installations may want to limit or disable the use
   of alternative addresses.  The question of whether a sender should
   attempt retries using the different addresses of a multihomed host
   has been controversial.  The main argument for using the multiple
   addresses is that it maximizes the likelihood of timely delivery, and
   indeed sometimes the likelihood of any delivery; the counter-argument
   is that it may result in unnecessary resource use.  Note that
   resource use is also strongly determined by the sending strategy
   discussed in Section 4.5.4.1.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 80]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   If an SMTP server receives a message with a destination for which it
   is a designated Mail eXchanger, it MAY relay the message (potentially
   after having rewritten the MAIL FROM and/or RCPT TO addresses), make
   final delivery of the message, or hand it off using some mechanism
   outside the SMTP-provided transport environment.  Of course, neither
   of the latter require that the list of MX records be examined
   further.

   If it determines that it should relay the message without rewriting
   the address, it MUST process the MX records as described above to
   determine candidates for delivery.

5.2.  IPv6 and MX Records

   In the contemporary Internet, SMTP clients and servers may be hosted
   on IPv4 systems, IPv6 systems, or dual-stack systems that are
   compatible with either version of the Internet Protocol.  The host
   domains to which MX records point may, consequently, contain "A RR"s
   (IPv4), "AAAA RR"s (IPv6), or any combination of them.  While RFC
   3974 [46] discusses some operational experience in mixed
   environments, it was not comprehensive enough to justify
   standardization, and some of its recommendations appear to be
   inconsistent with this specification.  The appropriate actions to be
   taken either will depend on local circumstances, such as performance
   of the relevant networks and any conversions that might be necessary,
   or will be obvious (e.g., an IPv6-only client need not attempt to
   look up A RRs or attempt to reach IPv4-only servers).  Designers of
   SMTP implementations that might run in IPv6 or dual-stack
   environments should study the procedures above, especially the
   comments about multihomed hosts, and, preferably, provide mechanisms
   to facilitate operational tuning and mail interoperability between
   IPv4 and IPv6 systems while considering local circumstances.

6.  Problem Detection and Handling

6.1.  Reliable Delivery and Replies by Email

   When the receiver-SMTP accepts a piece of mail (by sending a "250 OK"
   message in response to DATA), it is accepting responsibility for
   delivering or relaying the message.  It must take this responsibility
   seriously.  It MUST NOT lose the message for frivolous reasons, such
   as because the host later crashes or because of a predictable
   resource shortage.  Some reasons that are not considered frivolous
   are discussed in the next subsection and in Section 7.8.

   If there is a delivery failure after acceptance of a message, the
   receiver-SMTP MUST formulate and mail a notification message.  This
   notification MUST be sent using a null ("<>") reverse-path in the

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 81]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   envelope.  The recipient of this notification MUST be the address
   from the envelope return path (or the Return-Path: line).  However,
   if this address is null ("<>"), the receiver-SMTP MUST NOT send a
   notification.  Obviously, nothing in this section can or should
   prohibit local decisions (i.e., as part of the same system
   environment as the receiver-SMTP) to log or otherwise transmit
   information about null address events locally if that is desired.

   Some delivery failures after the message is accepted by SMTP will be
   unavoidable.  For example, it may be impossible for the receiving
   SMTP server to validate all the delivery addresses in RCPT command(s)
   due to a "soft" domain system error, because the target is a mailing
   list (see earlier discussion of RCPT), or because the server is
   acting as a relay and has no immediate access to the delivering
   system.

   To avoid receiving duplicate messages as the result of timeouts, a
   receiver-SMTP MUST seek to minimize the time required to respond to
   the final <CRLF>.<CRLF> end of data indicator.  See RFC 1047 [21] for
   a discussion of this problem.

6.2.  Unwanted, Unsolicited, and "Attack" Messages

   Utility and predictability of the Internet mail system requires that
   messages that can be delivered should be delivered, regardless of any
   syntax or other faults associated with those messages and regardless
   of their content.  If they cannot be delivered, and cannot be
   rejected by the SMTP server during the SMTP transaction, they should
   be "bounced" (returned with non-delivery notification messages) as
   described above.  In today's world, in which many SMTP server
   operators have discovered that the quantity of undesirable bulk email
   vastly exceeds the quantity of desired mail and in which accepting a
   message may trigger additional undesirable traffic by providing
   verification of the address, those principles may not be practical.

   As discussed in Section 7.8 and Section 7.9 below, dropping mail
   without notification of the sender is permitted in practice.
   However, it is extremely dangerous and violates a long tradition and
   community expectations that mail is either delivered or returned.  If
   silent message-dropping is misused, it could easily undermine
   confidence in the reliability of the Internet's mail systems.  So
   silent dropping of messages should be considered only in those cases
   where there is very high confidence that the messages are seriously
   fraudulent, pose a significant risk, or are otherwise inappropriate.

   To stretch the principle of delivery if possible even further, it may
   be a rational policy to not deliver mail that has an invalid return
   address, although the history of the network is that users are

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 82]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   typically better served by delivering any message that can be
   delivered.  Reliably determining that a return address is invalid can
   be a difficult and time-consuming process, especially if the putative
   sending system is not directly accessible or does not fully and
   accurately support VRFY and, even if a "drop messages with invalid
   return addresses" policy is adopted, it SHOULD be applied only when
   there is near-certainty that the return addresses are, in fact,
   invalid.

   Conversely, if a message is rejected because it is found to contain
   hostile content (a decision that is outside the scope of an SMTP
   server as defined in this document), rejection ("bounce") messages
   SHOULD NOT be sent unless the receiving site is confident that those
   messages will be usefully delivered.  The preference and default in
   these cases is to avoid sending non-delivery messages when the
   incoming message is determined to contain hostile content.

6.3.  Loop Detection

   Simple counting of the number of "Received:" header fields in a
   message has proven to be an effective, although rarely optimal,
   method of detecting loops in mail systems.  SMTP servers using this
   technique SHOULD use a large rejection threshold, normally at least
   100 Received entries.  Whatever mechanisms are used, servers MUST
   contain provisions for detecting and stopping trivial loops.

6.4.  Compensating for Irregularities

   Unfortunately, variations, creative interpretations, and outright
   violations of Internet mail protocols do occur; some would suggest
   that they occur quite frequently.  The debate as to whether a well-
   behaved SMTP receiver or relay should reject a malformed message,
   attempt to pass it on unchanged, or attempt to repair it to increase
   the odds of successful delivery (or subsequent reply) began almost
   with the dawn of structured network mail and shows no signs of
   abating.  Advocates of rejection claim that attempted repairs are
   rarely completely adequate and that rejection of bad messages is the
   only way to get the offending software repaired.  Advocates of
   "repair" or "deliver no matter what" argue that users prefer that
   mail go through it if at all possible and that there are significant
   market pressures in that direction.  In practice, these market
   pressures may be more important to particular vendors than strict
   conformance to the standards, regardless of the preference of the
   actual developers.

   The problems associated with ill-formed messages were exacerbated by
   the introduction of the split-UA mail reading protocols (Post Office
   Protocol (POP) version 2 [18], Post Office Protocol (POP) version 3

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 83]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   [28], IMAP version 2 [23], and PCMAIL [22]).  These protocols
   encouraged the use of SMTP as a posting (message submission)
   protocol, and SMTP servers as relay systems for these client hosts
   (which are often only intermittently connected to the Internet).
   Historically, many of those client machines lacked some of the
   mechanisms and information assumed by SMTP (and indeed, by the mail
   format protocol, RFC 822 [17]).  Some could not keep adequate track
   of time; others had no concept of time zones; still others could not
   identify their own names or addresses; and, of course, none could
   satisfy the assumptions that underlay RFC 822's conception of
   authenticated addresses.

   In response to these weak SMTP clients, many SMTP systems now
   complete messages that are delivered to them in incomplete or
   incorrect form.  This strategy is generally considered appropriate
   when the server can identify or authenticate the client, and there
   are prior agreements between them.  By contrast, there is at best
   great concern about fixes applied by a relay or delivery SMTP server
   that has little or no knowledge of the user or client machine.  Many
   of these issues are addressed by using a separate protocol, such as
   that defined in RFC 6409 [48], for message submission, rather than
   using originating SMTP servers for that purpose.

   The following changes to a message being processed MAY be applied
   when necessary by an originating SMTP server, or one used as the
   target of SMTP as an initial posting (message submission) protocol:

   *  Addition of a message-id field when none appears

   *  Addition of a date, time, or time zone when none appears

   *  Correction of addresses to proper FQDN format

   The less information the server has about the client, the less likely
   these changes are to be correct and the more caution and conservatism
   should be applied when considering whether or not to perform fixes
   and how.  These changes MUST NOT be applied by an SMTP server that
   provides an intermediate relay function.

   In all cases, properly operating clients supplying correct
   information are preferred to corrections by the SMTP server.  In all
   cases, documentation SHOULD be provided in trace header fields and/or
   header field comments for actions performed by the servers.

7.  Security Considerations

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 84]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

7.1.  Mail Security and Spoofing

   SMTP mail is inherently insecure in that it is feasible for even
   fairly casual users to negotiate directly with receiving and relaying
   SMTP servers and create messages that will trick a naive recipient
   into believing that they came from somewhere else.  Constructing such
   a message so that the "spoofed" behavior cannot be detected by an
   expert is somewhat more difficult, but not sufficiently so as to be a
   deterrent to someone who is determined and knowledgeable.
   Consequently, as knowledge of Internet mail increases, so does the
   knowledge that SMTP mail inherently cannot be authenticated, or
   integrity checks provided, at the transport level.  Real mail
   security lies only in end-to-end methods involving the message
   bodies, such as those that use digital signatures (see RFC 1847 [26]
   and, e.g., Pretty Good Privacy (PGP) in RFC 4880 [49] or Secure/
   Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (S/MIME) in RFC 8551 [45]).

   Various protocol extensions and configuration options that provide
   authentication at the transport level (e.g., from an SMTP client to
   an SMTP server) improve somewhat on the traditional situation
   described above.  However, in general, they only authenticate one
   server to another rather than a chain of relays and servers, much
   less authenticating users or user machines.  Consequently, unless
   they are accompanied by careful handoffs of responsibility in a
   carefully designed trust environment, they remain inherently weaker
   than end-to-end mechanisms that use digitally signed messages rather
   than depending on the integrity of the transport system.

   Efforts to make it more difficult for users to set envelope return
   path and header "From" fields to point to valid addresses other than
   their own are largely misguided: they frustrate legitimate
   applications in which mail is sent by one user on behalf of another,
   in which error (or normal) replies should be directed to a special
   address, or in which a single message is sent to multiple recipients
   on different hosts.  (Systems that provide convenient ways for users
   to alter these header fields on a per-message basis should attempt to
   establish a primary and permanent mailbox address for the user so
   that Sender header fields within the message data can be generated
   sensibly.)

   This specification does not further address the authentication issues
   associated with SMTP other than to advocate that useful functionality
   not be disabled in the hope of providing some small margin of
   protection against a user who is trying to fake mail.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 85]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

7.2.  Hiding Addresses from Trace

   Addresses that do not appear in the message header section may appear
   in the RCPT commands to an SMTP server for a number of reasons.  The
   two most common involve the use of a mailing address as a "list
   exploder" (a single address that resolves into multiple addresses)
   and the appearance of "blind copies".  When more than one RCPT
   command is present, and in order to avoid defeating some of the
   purpose of these mechanisms, SMTP clients and servers SHOULD NOT copy
   the RCPT command arguments into the header section, either as part of
   trace header fields or as informational or private-extension header
   fields.  See Section 7.6 for discussion of some related issues.

   There is no inherent relationship between either "reverse" (from the
   MAIL command) or "forward" (RCPT) addresses in the SMTP transaction
   ("envelope") and the addresses in the header section.  Receiving
   systems SHOULD NOT attempt to deduce such relationships and use them
   to alter the header section of the message for delivery.  The popular
   "Apparently-to" header field is a violation of this principle as well
   as a common source of unintended information disclosure and SHOULD
   NOT be used.

7.3.  VRFY, EXPN, and Security

   As discussed in Section 3.5, individual sites may want to disable
   either or both of VRFY or EXPN for security reasons (see below).  As
   a corollary to the above, implementations that permit this MUST NOT
   appear to have verified addresses that are not, in fact, verified.
   If a site disables these commands for security reasons, the SMTP
   server MUST return a 252 response, rather than a code that could be
   confused with successful or unsuccessful verification.

   Returning a 250 reply code with the address listed in the VRFY
   command after having checked it only for syntax violates this rule.
   Of course, an implementation that "supports" VRFY by always returning
   550 whether or not the address is valid is equally not in
   conformance.

   On the public Internet, the contents of mailing lists have become
   popular as an address information source for so-called "spammers."
   The use of EXPN to "harvest" addresses has increased as list
   administrators have installed protections against inappropriate uses
   of the lists themselves.  However, VRFY and EXPN are still useful for
   authenticated users and within an administrative domain.  For
   example, VRFY and EXPN are useful for performing internal audits of
   how email gets routed to check and to make sure no one is
   automatically forwarding sensitive mail outside the organization.
   Sites implementing SMTP authentication may choose to make VRFY and

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 86]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   EXPN available only to authenticated requestors.  Implementations
   SHOULD still provide support for EXPN, but sites SHOULD carefully
   evaluate the tradeoffs.

   Whether disabling VRFY provides any real marginal security depends on
   a series of other conditions.  In many cases, RCPT commands can be
   used to obtain the same information about address validity.  On the
   other hand, especially in situations where determination of address
   validity for RCPT commands is deferred until after the DATA command
   is received, RCPT may return no information at all, while VRFY is
   expected to make a serious attempt to determine validity before
   generating a response code (see discussion above).

7.4.  Mail Rerouting Based on the 251 and 551 Response Codes

   Before a client uses the 251 or 551 reply codes from a RCPT command
   to automatically update its future behavior (e.g., updating the
   user's address book), it should be certain of the server's
   authenticity.  If it does not, it may be subject to a man in the
   middle attack.

7.5.  Information Disclosure in Announcements

   There has been an ongoing debate about the tradeoffs between the
   debugging advantages of announcing server type and version (and,
   sometimes, even server domain name) in the greeting response or in
   response to the HELP command and the disadvantages of exposing
   information that might be useful in a potential hostile attack.  The
   utility of the debugging information is beyond doubt.  Those who
   argue for making it available point out that it is far better to
   actually secure an SMTP server rather than hope that trying to
   conceal known vulnerabilities by hiding the server's precise identity
   will provide more protection.  Sites are encouraged to evaluate the
   tradeoff with that issue in mind; implementations SHOULD minimally
   provide for making type and version information available in some way
   to other network hosts.

7.6.  Information Disclosure in Trace Fields

   In some circumstances, such as when mail originates from within a LAN
   whose hosts are not directly on the public Internet, trace (e.g.,
   "Received") header fields produced in conformance with this
   specification may disclose host names and similar information that
   would not normally be available.  This ordinarily does not pose a
   problem, but sites with special concerns about name disclosure should
   be aware of it.  Also, the optional FOR clause should not be supplied
   when the same message is sent to multiple recipients in the same mail
   transaction in order not to inadvertently disclose the identities of

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 87]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   "blind copy" recipients to others.

7.7.  Information Disclosure in Message Forwarding

   As discussed in Section 3.4.1, use of the 251 or 551 reply codes to
   identify the replacement address associated with a mailbox may
   inadvertently disclose sensitive information.  Sites that are
   concerned about those issues should ensure that they select and
   configure servers appropriately.

7.8.  Local Operational Requirements and Resistance to Attacks

   In recent years, there has been an increase of attacks on SMTP
   servers, either in conjunction with attempts to discover addresses
   for sending unsolicited messages or simply to make the servers
   inaccessible to others (i.e., as an application-level denial of
   service attack).  There may also be important local circumstances
   that justify departures from some of the limits specified in this
   documents especially ones involving maximums or minimums.  While the
   means of doing so are beyond the scope of this Standard, rational
   operational behavior requires that servers be permitted to detect
   such attacks and take action to defend themselves.  For example, if a
   server determines that a large number of RCPT commands are being
   sent, most or all with invalid addresses, as part of such an attack,
   it would be reasonable for the server to close the connection after
   generating an appropriate number of 5yz (normally 550) replies.

7.9.  Scope of Operation of SMTP Servers

   It is a well-established principle that an SMTP server may refuse to
   accept mail for any operational or technical reason that makes sense
   to the site providing the server.  However, cooperation among sites
   and installations makes the Internet possible.  If sites take
   excessive advantage of the right to reject traffic, the ubiquity of
   email availability (one of the strengths of the Internet) will be
   threatened; considerable care should be taken and balance maintained
   if a site decides to be selective about the traffic it will accept
   and process.

   Relay function through arbitrary sites, as part of hostile efforts to
   hide the actual origins of mail, has become so common that most sites
   limit the use of the relay function to known or identifiable sources.

   Implementations SHOULD provide the capability to perform this type of
   analysis of message sources and potential message rejection as a
   result.  When mail is rejected for these or other policy reasons, a
   550 code SHOULD be used in response to EHLO (or HELO), MAIL, or RCPT
   as appropriate.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 88]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

8.  IANA Considerations

8.1.  SMTP-related Registries

   IANA maintains five registries in support of this specification, the
   first two of which were created for RFC 2821 or earlier.  The
   additional ones were defined or expanded by RFC 5321 or added
   subsequently.  The registry references listed are as of the time of
   publication; IANA does not guarantee the locations associated with
   the URLs in those references.  The subsections that follow describe
   the general purpose and intent for those registries and substantive
   modifications to existing ones.  Information about actual registry
   structure requirements appears in Section 8.3.

8.1.1.  Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) Service Extensions

8.1.1.1.  Registration Models

   In order to accommodate both a significant review of proposed
   extensions for those who find that useful and a minimally restrictive
   registration procedure for those who simply want to avoid name
   conflicts and similar problems, this registry supports two different
   registration models.

   The first, "Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) Service Extensions"
   [57], often referred to in this document as [the] "Service Extension
   Registry", consists of SMTP service extensions with the associated
   keywords, and, as needed, parameters, verbs, and related information.

   As noted in Section 2.2.2, SMTP Extensions MUST be registered.

   // Note in draft: It is assumed that much of the following will be
   // replaced by either a normative reference to draft-klensin-iana-
   // consid-hybrid or by one to RFC8126bis if either is approved or
   // sufficiently close to approval before this document is ready for
   // publication.

   The would-be registrant shall pick between the two models described
   below although, if the first is attempted and proves unsuccessful,
   the second may then be chosen:

   1.  IETF Review and Approval

       The document goes through the normal IETF review and approval
       process, culminating in a published Standards Track, BCP,
       Experimental, or, in rare cases specifically approved by the
       IESG, an IETF Stream Informational RFC.  The intent is that the

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 89]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

       extension and its specification will represent careful IETF
       community review and consensus on its technical merits, utility,
       and clarity of explanation.  The change controller for all such
       extensions will be the IETF.

       This model is approximately equivalent to "IETF Review" as
       described in RFC 8126/ BCP 26 [3], but involves a stronger
       preference for a Standards Track or Experimental publication as a
       result.

       // NOTE IN DRAFT: Section numbers from RFC 8126 have been
       // deliberately omitted here and below in the expectation (or at
       // least hope) that document will be replaced or updated to
       contain
       // an explicit "two alternatives" model like this one before or
       soon
       // after this document is published.

   2.  Simple Registration

       The sole purpose of this option is to get the extension name and
       contact information registered in order to minimize the risk of
       the same extension name being used for different purposes.  The
       intent is that there be no barrier to such registrations other
       than the time and effort required to submit the request itself.
       Registrants are encouraged to provide documentation of the
       extension, its interactions with other specifications, etc., and
       to consult individuals or groups with SMTP experience for advice,
       but none of that is required.  The change controller for all such
       extensions will be the registrant unless otherwise specified in
       the registration request.

       Even if this model is chosen, it is expected that registrants
       will supply all of the information in the list below and as
       described above and in Section 2.2.2 as either part of the
       registration or in supplemental documents that will be referenced
       from the registry.  However, the primary goals of getting
       extensions registered according to this model are to avoid
       conflicts about naming (e.g., two different deployed extensions
       with the same name or keyword) and to either identify a stable
       and generally available specification or to establish contact
       information for additional information.  Consequently, if no
       information is available for some of the listed items, notably
       Section 8.1.1.2, Paragraph 2, Item 9 and Section 8.1.1.2,
       Paragraph 2, Item 10, the registry entry should be made with the
       absence of such data noted in the registry as "Not supplied".

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 90]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

       This model is approximately equivalent to "First Come First
       Served" as described in RFC 8126/ BCP 26. [3]

   IANA will, based on their own judgment, identify in the registry
   which model was chosen by a column entry or will create a pair of
   subregistries, one for each model.

8.1.1.2.  Registry Information

   The following information shall be supplied as part of a registration
   application and will be incorporated into the registry.

   (1)   the textual name of the SMTP service extension;

   (2)   a summary of the purpose of the extension and what it is
         expected to accomplish.

   (3)   the EHLO keyword value associated with the extension;

   (4)   the syntax and possible values of parameters associated with
         the EHLO keyword value;

   (5)   any additional SMTP verbs associated with the extension
         (additional verbs will usually be, but are not required to be,
         the same as, or begin with, the EHLO keyword value);

   (6)   any new parameters the extension associates with the MAIL or
         RCPT verbs;

   (7)   Level of approval.  Values: Standards Track, IETF Experimental,
         Individual (or reasonable abbreviations).

   (8)   Message submission use.  Values: Keyword indicating relevance
         for use in message submission as described in Section 7 of RFC
         6409 [48].  For any registration prior to the publication of
         <<This document>> for which this information was not specified
         in RFC 6409 or the registration request, this entry in the
         registry will be set to "MUST NOT".

   (9)   a description of how support for the extension affects the
         behavior of a server and client SMTP;

   (10)  the increment by which the extension is increasing the maximum
         length of the commands MAIL and/or RCPT over that specified in
         this Standard or other registrations that might reasonably be
         expected to interact with it; and

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 91]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   (11)  Contact information for the submitter or other responsible
         party and identification of the change controller.  The change
         controller value MUST be "IETF" for all SMTP extensions
         specified in IETF Stream RFCs and MUST provide appropriate
         authority and contact information for all other extensions.

8.1.2.  Address Literal Tags

   The second registry, "Address Literal Tags" [62], consists of "tags"
   that identify forms of domain literals other than those for IPv4
   addresses (specified in RFC 821 and in this document).  The initial
   entry in that registry is for IPv6 addresses (specified in this
   document).  Additional literal types require standardization (IETF
   "Standards Action") before being used; none are anticipated at this
   time.

8.1.3.  Mail Transmission Types

   The third, "Mail Transmission Types" [58], established by RFC 821 and
   renewed by this specification, is a registry of link and protocol
   identifiers to be used with the "via" and "with" subclauses of the
   time stamp ("Received:" header field) described in Section 4.4.  Link
   and protocol identifiers in addition to those specified in this
   document may be registered only according to the "RFC Required"
   procedure described in RFC 8126/ BCP 26 [3].

   An additional subregistry has been added to the "VIA link types" and
   "WITH protocol types" subregistries of this registry to contain
   registrations of "Additional-registered-clauses" as described above
   and in the subsection that follows.

8.1.4.  Additional Registered Clauses

   As mentioned in Section 4.4.4 above, additional clauses for the
   "Received:" header field may be added by future specifications
   (details below).  IANA has created a registry for such clauses [60].
   The registry will contain the Clause Name; the name of, and pointer
   to, any associated enabling Service Extension; a short description; a
   syntax summary; and a reference to a more complete specification.

   As new clauses are defined, they may, in principle, specify creation
   of their own registries if the Strings consist of reserved terms or
   keywords rather than less restricted strings.  Additional clauses,
   may be registered only by the "IETF Review" procedure described in
   RFC 8126/ BCP 26 [3].

8.2.  New Registry Actions with <<This Document>>

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 92]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   (1)  [IANA is requested to] To improve clarity VRFY is added to the
        Service Extensions Registry [57] immediately before the entry
        for EXPN.  The Note should read: "Implementation support for
        VRFY is required in servers but the listing in the EHLO response
        is optional".  See Section 3.5.2 for details on this subject.

   (2)  For <<This Document>>, several changes have been made in
        Section 2.2.2 and above, particularly in Section 8.1, most as
        consequences from the change from requiring IETF approval for
        registration of new extensions.

8.3.  Specification of Registry Group and Registry Structure

   The Mail Parameters Registry Group should be reorganized as follows.

   (1)   The registry for Address Literals [62] should be consolidated
         into the Mail Parameters Registry Group.  Those literals are
         specified only for email purposes and have no established
         meaning elsewhere.

   (2)   Please insert a category for "Associated registries located
         elsewhere" after the "Registries included below" group at the
         top of the MAIL Parameters Group page.  There should be one
         entry in the new category: the name "Message Headers" and a
         link to the appropriate registry [61].  Also, consider renaming
         that registry group: there is no obvious reason to capitalize
         "MAIL", all the the registries and subregistries in the group
         are SMTP-related, and the most important of them is not about
         parameters at all.  So, perhaps, "SMTP-related Registries" or
         some such thing.  If that is done, "MAIL Parameters" should
         probably be retained as a comment or parenthetical note because
         it is almost certainly referenced from other documents.

   (3)   The registry referred to in this document as "Simple Mail
         Transfer Protocol (SMTP) Service Extensions" or "Service
         Extensions Registry" is currently called "SMTP Service
         Extensions" [57].  That name is acceptable, but should be
         reviewed by IANA to see if a different name would be more
         appropriate.

   (4)   In the header of the Service Extensions Registry, the reference
         to RFC 5321 Section 2.2 should be changed to point to
         Section 8.1.1 and Section 2.2.2 of this document in that order.
         If "SMTP Service Extension Parameters" is maintained as a
         subregistry (see Section 8.3, Paragraph 2, Item 8 below), the
         same fix should be applied there and supplemented by a pointer
         to the Service Extension Registry itself.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 93]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   (5)   The description in the Service Extension Registry should make
         it explicit that any of the descriptions called for in the
         bullet items listed in Section 8.1.1 except for the first six
         and Section 8.1.1.2, Paragraph 2, Item 11 may be supplied by
         reference to a stable and easily available external document.

   (6)   Those bullet point fields should be separated; i.e., none of
         them should be combined into "Description".  Information that
         is not supplied with the registration or supplemental documents
         should be explicitly identified as "Not supplied by submitter"
         or with an explicit note pointing to that phrase.

   (7)   The "Registration Procedure(s)" for the Service Extensions
         Registry and, if it is retained, the value for "SMTP Service
         Extension Parameters" subregistry should be changed to
         "Specification Required".

   (8)   The fields in the Service Extension Registry for keyword
         parameter values (Section 8.1.1.2, Paragraph 2, Item 4) and
         MAIL or RCPT parameter values (Section 8.1.1.2, Paragraph 2,
         Item 6) should either contain those values or, if IANA prefers
         to retain separate subregistries, explicit pointers to the
         associated entries in those subregistries (not just a pointer
         to the subregistry itself).  In the latter cases, the header
         for the subregistries should point back to the associated
         numbered item in the Service Extension Registry.

   (9)   Another subregistry question arises with the MT-PRIORITY
         extension.  The authors of RFC 6710 (one of whom is obviously
         quite handy) should review how that extension is handled,
         including whether the use of "MT-PRIORITY" in some places as
         "PRIORITY" in others is confusing.  At present, it is listed as
         a Service Extension, in the Extension Parameters list, and with
         its own separate registry in the Mail Parameters registry group
         [59] [56].  At least that registry should be shown as a sub-
         subregistry of the Service Extensions Registry and/or carefully
         cross-referenced.

   (10)  In the "Mail Transmission Types" registry [58], the first part
         of the "Note" should read "The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
         <<This Document>> and the Standard for Internet Message Formats
         [16] specify that...".  The Reference in that registry should
         be to Section 8.1.3 and [16].

9.  Acknowledgments

   Many people contributed to the development of RFCs 2821 and 5321.
   Those documents should be consulted for those acknowledgments.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 94]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Neither this document nor RFCs 2821 or 5321 would have been possible
   without the many contribution and insights of the late Jon Postel and
   Ned Freed.  Jon Postel's contributions of course include the original
   specification of SMTP in RFC 821.  A considerable quantity of text
   from RFC 821 still appears in this document as do several of Jon's
   original examples that have been updated only as needed to reflect
   other changes in the specification.  Ned Freed's many contributions
   from multiple perspectives, as author or co-author of several of the
   documents that were folded into this one, and an extremely careful
   reader who identified and proposed corrections to problems that
   others missed, were similarly invaluable.

   The following filed errata against RFC 5321 that were not rejected at
   the time of submission: Jasen Betts, Adrien de Croy, Guillaume
   Fortin-Debigare, Roberto Javier Godoy, David Romerstein, Dominic
   Sayers, Rodrigo Speller, Alessandro Vesely, and Brett Watson.  Some
   of those individuals made additional suggestions after the EMAILCORE
   WG was initiated.  In addition to the above, several of whom
   continued to make other suggestions, specific suggestions that led to
   corrections and improvements in early versions of the current
   specification were received from Dave Crocker, Ned Freed, Arnt
   Gulbrandsen, Tony Hansen, Barry Leiba, Ivar Lumi, Pete Resnick,
   Hector Santos, Paul Smith and others.

   chetti contributed an analysis that clarified the ABNF productions
   that implicitly reference other documents.

   The EMAILCORE Working Group was chartered in September 2020 with
   Alexey Melnikov and Seth Blank as co-chairs.  Todd Herr replaced Seth
   Blank early in 2021.  Without their leadership and technical
   contributions, and the efforts of WG participants under their
   guidance, this document would never have been completed.  Many
   participants in the WG reviewed the document or portions of it and
   made comments that resulted in improvement.  During the last stages
   of working group consideration of this document, careful reviews of
   the specification in its entirety by Alexey Melnikov, John Levine,
   Rob Sayre, and Tim Wicinski contributed significantly to the clarity
   of the final version and its relationship to other IETF work.

10.  References

10.1.  Normative References

   [1]        Bradner, S., "Key words for use in RFCs to Indicate
              Requirement Levels", BCP 14, RFC 2119,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC2119, March 1997,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2119>.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 95]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   [2]        Leiba, B., "Ambiguity of Uppercase vs Lowercase in RFC
              2119 Key Words", BCP 14, RFC 8174, DOI 10.17487/RFC8174,
              May 2017, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8174>.

   [3]        Cotton, M., Leiba, B., and T. Narten, "Guidelines for
              Writing an IANA Considerations Section in RFCs", BCP 26,
              RFC 8126, DOI 10.17487/RFC8126, June 2017,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8126>.

   [4]        ANSI, "USA Code for Information Interchange",
              ANSI X3.4-1968, 1968.  ANSI X3.4-1968 has been replaced by
              newer versions with slight modifications, but the 1968
              version remains definitive for the Internet. The 1968
              version is also described for Internet purposes in RFC 20
              [5].

   [5]        Cerf, V., "ASCII format for network interchange", STD 80,
              RFC 20, DOI 10.17487/RFC0020, October 1969,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc20>.

   [6]        Postel, J., "Simple Mail Transfer Protocol", STD 10,
              RFC 821, DOI 10.17487/RFC0821, August 1982,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc821>.

   [7]        Mockapetris, P., "Domain names - implementation and
              specification", STD 13, RFC 1035, DOI 10.17487/RFC1035,
              November 1987, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1035>.

   [8]        Mockapetris, P., "Domain names - implementation and
              specification", Section 2.3.1, RFC 1035, November 1987,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc1035>.  // RFC Editor:
              If this explanation is not gone before you get this //
              document, please remove it.  After a rather detailed
              analysis, // there is no standards track document that
              explicitly updates RFC // 1035 (or 1034) to allow leading
              digits in "preferred syntax" // domain names.  What we
              have is the "situation described in the I-D // (reference
              [8] of draft- ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-24) in which //
              RFC 1123 allows leading digits in "host names" but does
              not do so // in the section that updates the DNS specs.
              As pointed out in RFC // 8499, "host name" has been used
              and misused for several different // things, including as
              only the first (leftmost) label in a fully- // qualified
              domain name.  The discussion of the "host name" //
              terminology in that RFC has been read to settle the issue
              by // equating "host name" syntax to "preferred name
              syntax", but it // does not update 1123 and, equally
              important, uses "often meant" to // describe the

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 96]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

              relationship between the two terms and, in the //
              subsequent paragraph and as mentioned above, talks about
              the other // things that "host name" might mean (including
              only the first label // "of a fully-qualified domain
              name).  The text in the reference in // the document is an
              attempt to explain this situation without // making claims
              about, e.g., document updates that are not supported // by
              RFC metadata or the structure of RFC 1123.  The adventure
              of // trying to figure the above out turned up another
              possible issue or // two.  This document references RFC
              1035 while rfc5322bis uses a // reference group and
              references STD13.  We cannot use STD13 in // several of
              the places 1035 is referenced from rfc5321bis because //
              we call out section numbers and, while the "preferred name
              syntax" // is defined in both RFC 1034 and RFC 1035
              (please don't ask me why // -- I don't have a clue), the
              section numbers are different.  If // anyone has useful
              thoughts about what we should do about that, do // say
              something on-list.  This section of RFC 1035 defined the
              "preferred name syntax" as excluding leading digits in
              those names. Whether the restriction was accidental or
              deliberate, at least one second-level domain name starting
              with a digit had appeared in the DNS by the end of 1986,
              almost a year before RFC 1035 appeared.  The restriction
              was removed for "host names" in RFC 1123 [10].  The
              terminology description for the DNS [9] clarified that
              "host name" was "often meant to be a domain name that
              follows the rules... of 'preferred name syntax'".  So the
              syntax for "domain name" in Section 2.3.5 above is
              consistent with the DNS specifications as generally
              interpreted.

   [9]        Hoffman, P., Sullivan, A., and K. Fujiwara, "DNS
              Terminology", BCP 219, RFC 8499, DOI 10.17487/RFC8499,
              January 2019, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8499>.

   [10]       Braden, R., Ed., "Requirements for Internet Hosts -
              Application and Support", STD 3, RFC 1123,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC1123, October 1989,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1123>.

   [11]       Klensin, J., Freed, N., and K. Moore, "SMTP Service
              Extension for Message Size Declaration", STD 10, RFC 1870,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC1870, November 1995,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1870>.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 97]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   [12]       Vaudreuil, G., "Enhanced Mail System Status Codes",
              RFC 3463, DOI 10.17487/RFC3463, January 2003,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3463>.

   [13]       Newman, C., "ESMTP and LMTP Transmission Types
              Registration", RFC 3848, DOI 10.17487/RFC3848, July 2004,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3848>.

   [14]       Hinden, R. and S. Deering, "IP Version 6 Addressing
              Architecture", RFC 4291, DOI 10.17487/RFC4291, February
              2006, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4291>.

   [15]       Crocker, D., Ed. and P. Overell, "Augmented BNF for Syntax
              Specifications: ABNF", STD 68, RFC 5234,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC5234, January 2008,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5234>.

   [16]       Resnick, P., "Internet Message Format", 2024,
              <https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/draft-ietf-emailcore-
              rfc5322bis/>.  Note to RFC Editor and WG: This reference,
              and citations to it (including mentions of "RFC 5322bis",
              "RFC5322bis", and other variations) should be updated to
              the correct RFC number and other information when work on
              rfc5321bis (this document) and rfc5322bis is complete.
              All references to the original RFC 5322 has been removed
              from this specification.  Once that update has been
              accomplished, this note should be removed.

10.2.  Informative References

   [17]       Crocker, D., "STANDARD FOR THE FORMAT OF ARPA INTERNET
              TEXT MESSAGES", STD 11, RFC 822, DOI 10.17487/RFC0822,
              August 1982, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc822>.

   [18]       Butler, M., Postel, J., Chase, D., Goldberger, J., and J.
              Reynolds, "Post Office Protocol: Version 2", RFC 937,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC0937, February 1985,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc937>.

   [19]       Postel, J. and J. Reynolds, "File Transfer Protocol",
              STD 9, RFC 959, DOI 10.17487/RFC0959, October 1985,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc959>.

   [20]       Partridge, C., "Mail routing and the domain system",
              STD 10, RFC 974, DOI 10.17487/RFC0974, January 1986,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc974>.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 98]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   [21]       Partridge, C., "Duplicate messages and SMTP", RFC 1047,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC1047, February 1988,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1047>.

   [22]       Lambert, M., "PCMAIL: A distributed mail system for
              personal computers", RFC 1056, DOI 10.17487/RFC1056, June
              1988, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1056>.

   [23]       Crispin, M., "Interactive Mail Access Protocol: Version
              2", RFC 1176, DOI 10.17487/RFC1176, August 1990,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1176>.

   [24]       Klensin, J., Freed, N., Ed., Rose, M., Stefferud, E., and
              D. Crocker, "SMTP Service Extensions", RFC 1425,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC1425, February 1993,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1425>.

   [25]       Durand, A. and F. Dupont, "SMTP 521 Reply Code", RFC 1846,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC1846, September 1995,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1846>.

   [26]       Galvin, J., Murphy, S., Crocker, S., and N. Freed,
              "Security Multiparts for MIME: Multipart/Signed and
              Multipart/Encrypted", RFC 1847, DOI 10.17487/RFC1847,
              October 1995, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1847>.

   [27]       Klensin, J., Freed, N., Rose, M., Stefferud, E., and D.
              Crocker, "SMTP Service Extensions", STD 10, RFC 1869,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC1869, November 1995,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1869>.

   [28]       Myers, J. and M. Rose, "Post Office Protocol - Version 3",
              STD 53, RFC 1939, DOI 10.17487/RFC1939, May 1996,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1939>.

   [29]       De Winter, J., "SMTP Service Extension for Remote Message
              Queue Starting", RFC 1985, DOI 10.17487/RFC1985, August
              1996, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1985>.

   [30]       Freed, N. and N. Borenstein, "Multipurpose Internet Mail
              Extensions (MIME) Part One: Format of Internet Message
              Bodies", RFC 2045, DOI 10.17487/RFC2045, November 1996,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2045>.

   [31]       Moore, K., "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions)
              Part Three: Message Header Extensions for Non-ASCII Text",
              RFC 2047, DOI 10.17487/RFC2047, November 1996,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2047>.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024                [Page 99]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   [32]       Kille, S., "MIXER (Mime Internet X.400 Enhanced Relay):
              Mapping between X.400 and RFC 822/MIME", RFC 2156,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC2156, January 1998,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2156>.

   [33]       Elz, R. and R. Bush, "Clarifications to the DNS
              Specification", RFC 2181, DOI 10.17487/RFC2181, July 1997,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2181>.

   [34]       Freed, N. and K. Moore, "MIME Parameter Value and Encoded
              Word Extensions: Character Sets, Languages, and
              Continuations", RFC 2231, DOI 10.17487/RFC2231, November
              1997, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2231>.

   [35]       Klensin, J., Ed., "Simple Mail Transfer Protocol",
              RFC 2821, DOI 10.17487/RFC2821, April 2001,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2821>.

   [36]       Freed, N., "SMTP Service Extension for Command
              Pipelining", STD 60, RFC 2920, DOI 10.17487/RFC2920,
              September 2000, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2920>.

   [37]       Freed, N., "Behavior of and Requirements for Internet
              Firewalls", RFC 2979, DOI 10.17487/RFC2979, October 2000,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2979>.

   [38]       Vaudreuil, G., "SMTP Service Extensions for Transmission
              of Large and Binary MIME Messages", RFC 3030,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC3030, December 2000,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3030>.

   [39]       Moore, K., "Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) Service
              Extension for Delivery Status Notifications (DSNs)",
              RFC 3461, DOI 10.17487/RFC3461, January 2003,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3461>.

   [40]       Moore, K. and G. Vaudreuil, "An Extensible Message Format
              for Delivery Status Notifications", RFC 3464,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC3464, January 2003,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3464>.

   [41]       Melnikov, A., Ed. and B. Leiba, Ed., "Internet Message
              Access Protocol (IMAP) - Version 4rev2", RFC 9051,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC9051, August 2021,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc9051>.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 100]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   [42]       Klensin, J. and Y. Ko, "Overview and Framework for
              Internationalized Email", RFC 6530, DOI 10.17487/RFC6530,
              February 2012, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc6530>.

   [43]       Yao, J. and W. Mao, "SMTP Extension for Internationalized
              Email", RFC 6531, DOI 10.17487/RFC6531, February 2012,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc6531>.

   [44]       Hansen, T., Ed. and A. Melnikov, Ed., "Message Disposition
              Notification", STD 85, RFC 8098, DOI 10.17487/RFC8098,
              February 2017, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8098>.

   [45]       Schaad, J., Ramsdell, B., and S. Turner, "Secure/
              Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (S/MIME) Version 4.0
              Message Specification", RFC 8551, DOI 10.17487/RFC8551,
              April 2019, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8551>.

   [46]       Nakamura, M. and J. Hagino, "SMTP Operational Experience
              in Mixed IPv4/v6 Environments", RFC 3974,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC3974, January 2005,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3974>.

   [47]       Berners-Lee, T., Fielding, R., and L. Masinter, "Uniform
              Resource Identifier (URI): Generic Syntax", STD 66,
              RFC 3986, DOI 10.17487/RFC3986, January 2005,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3986>.

   [48]       Gellens, R. and J. Klensin, "Message Submission for Mail",
              STD 72, RFC 6409, DOI 10.17487/RFC6409, November 2011,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc6409>.

   [49]       Callas, J., Donnerhacke, L., Finney, H., Shaw, D., and R.
              Thayer, "OpenPGP Message Format", RFC 4880,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC4880, November 2007,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4880>.

   [50]       Hansen, T. and J. Klensin, "A Registry for SMTP Enhanced
              Mail System Status Codes", BCP 138, RFC 5248,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC5248, June 2008,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5248>.

   [51]       Klensin, J., Freed, N., Rose, M., and D. Crocker, Ed.,
              "SMTP Service Extension for 8-bit MIME Transport", STD 71,
              RFC 6152, DOI 10.17487/RFC6152, March 2011,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc6152>.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 101]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   [52]       Klensin, J., "SMTP 521 and 556 Reply Codes", RFC 7504,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC7504, June 2015,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc7504>.

   [53]       Levine, J. and M. Delany, "A "Null MX" No Service Resource
              Record for Domains That Accept No Mail", RFC 7505,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC7505, June 2015,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc7505>.

   [54]       Klensin, J., "Simple Mail Transfer Protocol", RFC 5321,
              DOI 10.17487/RFC5321, October 2008,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5321>.

   [55]       Klensin, J.C., Ed., Murchison, K., Ed., and E. Sam, Ed.,
              "Applicability Statement for IETF Core Email Protocols", 6
              August 2021, <https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/draft-ietf-
              emailcore-as/>.

   [56]       Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA), "Mail
              Parameters", 2022, <https://www.iana.org/assignments/mail-
              parameters/mail-parameters.xhtml>.

   [57]       Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA), "IANA Mail
              Parameters: SMTP Service Extensions", 2022,
              <https://www.iana.org/assignments/mail-parameters/mail-
              parameters.xhtml#mail-parameters-2>.

   [58]       Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA), "IANA Mail
              Parameters: Mail Transmission Types", 2022,
              <https://www.iana.org/assignments/mail-parameters/mail-
              parameters.xhtml#mail-parameters-5>.

   [59]       Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA), "IANA Mail
              Parameters: SMTP PRIORITY extension Priority Assignment
              Policy", 2022, <https://www.iana.org/assignments/mail-
              parameters/mail-parameters.xhtml#mail-parameters-9>.

   [60]       Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA), "IANA Mail
              Parameters: Additional-registered-clauses", 2022,
              <https://www.iana.org/assignments/mail-parameters/mail-
              parameters.xhtml#mail-parameters-8>.

   [61]       Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA), "Message
              Headers", 2022, <https://www.iana.org/assignments/message-
              headers/message-headers.xhtml>.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 102]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   [62]       Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA), "Address
              Literal Tags", 2007,
              <http://www.iana.org/assignments/address-literal-tags>.

   [63]       RFC Editor, "RFC Errata - RFC 5321", 2019,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/errata/rfc5321>.  Captured
              2019-11-19

   [64]       IANA, "SMTP Service Extensions", 2021,
              <https://www.iana.org/assignments/mail-parameters/mail-
              parameters.xhtml#mail-parameters-2>.  Notes in draft: RFC
              Editor: Please adjust date field to reflect whatever you
              want for a registry that is updated periodically.  IANA:
              Please determine if the above URL is a sufficiently stable
              reference and adjust as appropriate if it is not.

   [65]       RFC Editor, "RFC Errata: RFC 5321", 2022,
              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/errata/rfc5321>.  Captured
              2022-11-23

Appendix A.  TCP Transport Service

   The TCP connection supports the transmission of 8-bit bytes.  The
   SMTP data is 7-bit ASCII characters.  Each character is transmitted
   as an 8-bit byte with the high-order bit cleared to zero.  Service
   extensions may modify this rule to permit transmission of full 8-bit
   data bytes as part of the message body, or, if specifically designed
   to do so, in SMTP commands or responses.

Appendix B.  Generating SMTP Commands from Internet Message Format
             Header Fields

   Under ideal circumstances, SMTP servers as specified in this document
   would receive complete information, including proper envelope
   information, either from prior SMTP clients or from Message
   Submission systems that conform to RFC 6409.  SMTP servers that
   receive complete information would interact with the message body
   only by prepending trace information as discussed in Section 4.4
   above.

   On the other hand, there are systems in use that do not provide the
   complete information in the expected form.  Some are "gateways" as
   described in Section 2.3.10 (possibly including the special case of
   firewalls) and Section 3.7.  Some of those systems use an Internet
   Message Format [16] header section (or something similar without
   other information) as a substitute for a mail submission protocol
   that conforms to RFC 6409 [48] or otherwise require that SMTP-
   receivers make up commands from information in what SMTP considers

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 103]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   the message body before such a message is transmitted to the next
   system by the corresponding SMTP-sender.  This Appendix discusses
   some of the issues and appropriate actions when those situations are
   encountered.

   Nothing in this appendix, or elsewhere in this specification,
   encourages or allows an SMTP-receiver to alter message headers that
   are compliant with Internet Message Format specifications before the
   message is passed on to another system by the corresponding SMTP-
   sender.  When such messages are, or appear to be, compliant in that
   way, the message content is to be altered only by the addition, at
   the beginning of the content, of trace fields as specified in
   Section 4.4.

   While direct communication between a MUA and MTA (rather than through
   a Submission Server [48]) is a private matter, not covered by any
   Internet Standard, there are problems with this approach.  For
   example, there have been repeated problems with proper handling of
   "bcc" copies and redistribution lists when information that
   conceptually belongs to the mail envelope is not separated early in
   processing from header field information (and kept separate).

   It is recommended that an MUA provide its initial ("submission
   client") MTA with an envelope separate from the message itself.
   However, if the envelope is not supplied, the envelope SHOULD be
   generated as follows:

   1.  Each recipient address from a TO, CC, or BCC header field SHOULD
       be copied to a RCPT command (generating multiple message copies
       if that is required for queuing or delivery).  This includes any
       addresses listed in a RFC 822 "group".  Any BCC header fields
       SHOULD then be removed from the header section.

   2.  The return address in the MAIL command SHOULD, if possible, be
       derived from the system's identity for the submitting (local)
       user, and the "From:" header field otherwise.  If there is a
       system identity available, it SHOULD also be copied to the Sender
       header field if it is different from the address in the From
       header field.  (Any Sender header field that was already there
       SHOULD be removed.)  Systems may provide a way for submitters to
       override the envelope return address, but may want to restrict
       its use to privileged users.  This will not prevent mail forgery,
       but may lessen its incidence; see Section 7.1.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 104]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   When an MTA is being used in this way, it bears responsibility for
   ensuring that the message being transmitted is valid.  The mechanisms
   for checking that validity, and for handling (or returning) messages
   that are not valid at the time of arrival, are part of the MUA-MTA
   interface and not covered by this specification.

   A submission protocol based on Standard RFC 822 information alone
   MUST NOT be used to gateway a message from a foreign (non-SMTP) mail
   system into an SMTP environment.  Additional information to construct
   an envelope must come from some source in the other environment,
   whether supplemental header fields or the foreign system's envelope.

   Attempts to gateway messages using only their header "To" and "Cc"
   fields have repeatedly caused mail loops and other behavior adverse
   to the proper functioning of the Internet mail environment.  These
   problems have been especially common when the message originates from
   an Internet mailing list and is distributed into the foreign
   environment using envelope information.  When these messages are then
   processed by a header-section-only remailer, loops back to the
   Internet environment (and the mailing list) are almost inevitable.

Appendix C.  Placeholder (formerly Source Routes)

   // This entire section has been removed, with some material moved
   // into Appendix F.2.  This comment is retained as a temporary
   // placeholder because the WG, the Ticket list, and various email
   // threads refer to Appendix letters and it would not be good to
   // create confusion about that while rfc5321bis is under development.

Appendix D.  Scenarios

   This section presents complete scenarios of several types of SMTP
   sessions.  In the examples, "C:" indicates what is said by the SMTP
   client, and "S:" indicates what is said by the SMTP server.

D.1.  A Typical SMTP Transaction Scenario

   This SMTP example shows mail sent by Smith at host bar.com, and to
   Jones, Green, and Brown at host foo.com.  Here we assume that host
   bar.com contacts host foo.com directly.  The mail is accepted for
   Jones and Brown.  Green does not have a mailbox at host foo.com.

      S: 220 foo.com Simple Mail Transfer Service Ready
      C: EHLO bar.com
      S: 250-foo.com greets bar.com
      S: 250-8BITMIME
      S: 250-SIZE

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 105]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

      S: 250-DSN
      S: 250 HELP
      C: MAIL FROM:<Smith@bar.com>
      S: 250 OK
      C: RCPT TO:<Jones@foo.com>
      S: 250 OK
      C: RCPT TO:<Green@foo.com>
      S: 550 No such user here
      C: RCPT TO:<Brown@foo.com>
      S: 250 OK
      C: DATA
      S: 354 Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>
      C: Blah blah blah...
      C: ...etc. etc. etc.
      C: .
      S: 250 OK
      C: QUIT
      S: 221 foo.com Service closing transmission channel

D.2.  Aborted SMTP Transaction Scenario

      S: 220 foo.com Simple Mail Transfer Service Ready
      C: EHLO bar.com
      S: 250-foo.com greets bar.com
      S: 250-8BITMIME
      S: 250-SIZE
      S: 250-DSN
      S: 250 HELP
      C: MAIL FROM:<Smith@bar.com>
      S: 250 OK
      C: RCPT TO:<Jones@foo.com>
      S: 250 OK
      C: RCPT TO:<Green@foo.com>
      S: 550 No such user here
      C: RSET
      S: 250 OK
      C: QUIT
      S: 221 foo.com Service closing transmission channel

D.3.  Relayed Mail Scenario

   Step 1 -- Source Host to Relay Host
   The source host performs a DNS lookup on XYZ.COM (the destination
   address) and finds DNS MX records specifying xyz.com as the best
   preference and foo.com as a lower preference.  It attempts to open a
   connection to xyz.com and fails.  It then opens a connection to
   foo.com, with the following dialogue:

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 106]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

       S: 220 foo.com Simple Mail Transfer Service Ready
       C: EHLO bar.com
       S: 250-foo.com greets bar.com
       S: 250-8BITMIME
       S: 250-SIZE
       S: 250-DSN
       S: 250 HELP
       C: MAIL FROM:<JQP@bar.com>
       S: 250 OK
       C: RCPT TO:<Jones@XYZ.COM>
       S: 250 OK
       C: DATA
       S: 354 Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>
       C: Date: Thu, 21 May 1998 05:33:29 -0700
       C: From: John Q. Public <JQP@bar.com>
       C: Subject:  The Next Meeting of the Board
       C: To: Jones@xyz.com
       C:
       C: Bill:
       C: The next meeting of the board of directors will be
       C: on Tuesday.
       C:                         John.
       C: .
       S: 250 OK
       C: QUIT
       S: 221 foo.com Service closing transmission channel

   Step 2 -- Relay Host to Destination Host
   foo.com, having received the message, now does a DNS lookup on
   xyz.com.  It finds the same set of MX records, but cannot use the one
   that points to itself (or to any other host as a worse preference).
   It tries to open a connection to xyz.com itself and succeeds.  Then
   we have:

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 107]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

       S: 220 xyz.com Simple Mail Transfer Service Ready
       C: EHLO foo.com
       S: 250 xyz.com is on the air
       C: MAIL FROM:<JQP@bar.com>
       S: 250 OK
       C: RCPT TO:<Jones@XYZ.COM>
       S: 250 OK
       C: DATA
       S: 354 Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>
       C: Received: from bar.com by foo.com ; Thu, 21 May 1998
       C:     05:33:29 -0700
       C: Date: Thu, 21 May 1998 05:33:29 -0700
       C: From: John Q. Public <JQP@bar.com>
       C: Subject:  The Next Meeting of the Board
       C: To: Jones@xyz.com
       C:
       C: Bill:
       C: The next meeting of the board of directors will be
       C: on Tuesday.
       C:                         John.
       C: .
       S: 250 OK
       C: QUIT
       S: 221 xyz.com Service closing transmission channel

D.4.  Verifying and Sending Scenario

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 108]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

      S: 220 foo.com Simple Mail Transfer Service Ready
      C: EHLO bar.com
      S: 250-foo.com greets bar.com
      S: 250-8BITMIME
      S: 250-SIZE
      S: 250-DSN
      S: 250-VRFY
      S: 250 HELP
      C: VRFY Crispin
      S: 250 Mark Crispin <Admin.MRC@foo.com>
      C: MAIL FROM:<EAK@bar.com>
      S: 250 OK
      C: RCPT TO:<Admin.MRC@foo.com>
      S: 250 OK
      C: DATA
      S: 354 Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF>
      C: Blah blah blah...
      C: ...etc. etc. etc.
      C: .
      S: 250 OK
      C: QUIT
      S: 221 foo.com Service closing transmission channel

Appendix E.  Other Gateway Issues

   In general, gateways between the Internet and other mail systems
   SHOULD attempt to preserve any layering semantics across the
   boundaries between the two mail systems involved.  Gateway-
   translation approaches that attempt to take shortcuts by mapping
   (such as mapping envelope information from one system to the message
   header section or body of another) have generally proven to be
   inadequate in important ways.  Systems translating between
   environments that do not support both envelopes and a header section
   and Internet mail must be written with the understanding that some
   information loss is almost inevitable.

Appendix F.  Deprecated Features of RFC 821

   A few features of RFC 821 have proven to be problematic and SHOULD
   NOT be used in Internet mail.  Some of these features were deprecated
   in RFC 2821 in 2001; source routing and two-digit years in dates were
   deprecated even earlier, by RFC 1123 in 1989.  Of the domain literal
   forms, RFC 1123 required support only for the dotted decimal form.
   With the possible exception of old, hardware-embedded, applications,
   there is no longer any excuse for these features to appear on the
   contemporary Internet.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 109]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

F.1.  TURN

   This command, described in RFC 821, raises important security issues
   since, in the absence of strong authentication of the host requesting
   that the client and server switch roles, it can easily be used to
   divert mail from its correct destination.  Its use is deprecated;
   SMTP systems SHOULD NOT use it unless the server can authenticate the
   client.

F.2.  Source Routing

   RFC 821 utilized the concept of explicit source routing to get mail
   from one host to another via a series of relays.  Source routes could
   appear in either the <forward-path> or <reverse-path> to show the
   hosts through which mail would be routed to reach the destination.
   The requirement to utilize source routes in regular mail traffic was
   eliminated by the introduction of the domain name system "MX" record
   by RFC 974 in early 1986 and the last significant justification for
   them was eliminated by the introduction, in RFC 1123, of a clear
   requirement that addresses following an "@" must all be fully-
   qualified domain names.  Issues involving local aliases for mailboxes
   were addressed by the introduction of a separate specification for
   mail submission [48].  Consequently, there are no remaining
   justifications for the use of source routes other than support for
   very old SMTP clients.  Even use in mail system debugging is unlikely
   to work because almost all contemporary systems either ignore or
   reject them.

   Historically, for relay purposes, the forward-path may have been a
   source route of the form "@ONE,@TWO:JOE@THREE", where ONE, TWO, and
   THREE MUST be fully-qualified domain names.  This form was used to
   emphasize the distinction between an address and a route.  The
   mailbox (here, JOE@THREE) is an absolute address, and the route is
   information about how to get there.  The two concepts should not be
   confused.

   SMTP servers MAY continue to accept source route syntax as specified
   in this appendix.  If they do so, they SHOULD ignore the routes and
   utilize only the target domain in the address.  If they do utilize
   the source route, the message MUST be sent to the first domain shown
   in the address.

   In particular, a server MUST NOT guess at shortcuts within the source
   route.

   SMTP clients MUST NOT attempt to utilize explicit source routing.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 110]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   If source routes appear in mail received by an SMTP server contrary
   to the requirements and recommendations in this specification, RFC
   821 and the text below should be consulted for the mechanisms for
   constructing and updating the forward-path.  A server that is reached
   by means of a source route (e.g., its domain name appears first in
   the list in the forward-path) MUST remove its domain name from any
   forward-paths in which that domain name appears before forwarding the
   message and MAY remove all other source routing information.  Any
   source route information in the reverse-path SHOULD be removed by
   servers conforming to this specification.

   The following information is provided for historical information so
   that the source route syntax and application can be understood if
   needed.

   Syntax:
   The original form of the <Path> production in Section 4.1.2 was:

   Path  = "<" [ A-d-l ":" ] Mailbox ">"

   A-d-l  = At-domain *( "," At-domain )

   At-domain  = "@" Domain

   For example, suppose that a delivery service notification must be
   sent for a message that arrived with:
   MAIL FROM:<@a.example,@b.example:user@d.example>
   The notification message MUST be sent using:
   RCPT TO:<user@d.example>

F.3.  HELO

   As discussed in Sections 3.1 and 4.1.1, EHLO SHOULD be used rather
   than HELO when the server will accept the former.  Servers MUST
   continue to accept and process HELO in order to support older
   clients.

F.4.  #-literals

   RFC 821 provided for specifying an Internet address as a decimal
   integer host number prefixed by a pound sign, "#".  In practice, that
   form has been obsolete since the introduction of TCP/IP.  It is
   deprecated and MUST NOT be used.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 111]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

F.5.  Dates and Years

   When dates are inserted into messages by SMTP clients or servers
   (e.g., in trace header fields), four-digit years MUST BE used.  Two-
   digit years are deprecated; three-digit years were never permitted in
   the Internet mail system.

F.6.  Sending versus Mailing

   In addition to specifying a mechanism for delivering messages to user
   mailboxes, RFC 821 provided additional, optional, commands to deliver
   messages directly to the user's terminal screen.  These commands
   (SEND, SAML, SOML) were rarely implemented, and changes in
   workstation technology and the introduction of other protocols may
   have rendered them obsolete even where they are implemented.

   Clients SHOULD NOT use SEND, SAML, or SOML commands.  If a server
   implements them, the implementation model specified in RFC 821 [6]
   MUST be used and the command names MUST be published in the response
   to the EHLO command.

Appendix G.  Other Outstanding Issues

   [[RFC Editor: Please remove this section before publication.]]

   In December 2019, an issue was raised on the ietf-smtp@ietf.org list
   that led to a broad discussion of ways in which existing practice had
   diverged from the specifications and recommendations of RFC 5321 in
   the more than eleven years since it was published (some of those
   issues probably affect the boundary between RFC 5321 and 5322 and
   hence the latter as well).  In most cases, those divergences call for
   revision of the Technical Specification to match the practice,
   clarification of the specification text in other ways, or a more
   comprehensive explanation of why the practices recommended by the
   specification should really be followed.

   Those discussions raised two other issues, which were that

   *  The publication of the Submission Server specification of RFC 6409
      in November 2011 may not have been fully reflected in RFC 5321
      (despite the even earlier publication of RFC 4409) and

   *  There may be inconsistencies between the July 2009 Internet Mail
      Architecture description of RFC 5598 and the model described in
      RFC 5321.  The issue called out in Appendix H.3 below may be an
      example of one of those inconsistencies.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 112]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Those discrepancies should be identified and discussed and decisions
   made to fix them (and where) or to ignore them and let them continue.

   There has also been discussion on the mailing list, perhaps amounting
   to very rough consensus, that any revision of RFC 5321 and/or 5322
   should be accompanied by a separate Applicability Statement document
   that would make recommendations about applicability or best practices
   in particular areas rather than trying to get everything into the two
   technical specifications.  This appendix does not attempt to identify
   which issues should get which treatment.

   This work is now (starting in the last half of 2020) being considered
   in the EMAILCORE WG.  This appendix will act as a temporary record of
   issues that should be discussed and decided upon before a revised
   SMTP specification (or a related Applicability Statement) is
   published, issues that have not been reflected in errata (see
   Appendix I.1 below for those covered by errata).

   Ticket numbers listed below and in the appendix that follows
   reference the list in <https://github.com/ietf-wg-
   emailcore/emailcore/issues/> (formerly
   <https://trac.ietf.org/trac/emailcore/report/1)>).

G.1.  IP Address literals (closed)

   Closed for RFC5321bis; issue for A/S.  See Appendix H.1

G.2.  Repeated Use of EHLO (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.2

G.3.  Meaning of "MTA" and Related Terminology (closed)

   Done, note added -11, closed.  Appendix H.3.

G.4.  Originator, or Originating System, Authentication (closed)

   This topic should be addressed in the A/S.  See Appendix H.4.

G.5.  Remove or deprecate the work-around from code 552 to 452 (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.6.

G.6.  Clarify where the protocol stands with respect to submission and
      TLS issues (Closed)

   Reclassified to A/S issue, no ticket assigned, see Appendix H.28.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 113]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

G.7.  Probably-substantive Discussion Topics Identified in Other Ways
      (closed or OBE)

   The following issues were identified as a group in the opening Note
   but called out specifically only in embedded CREF comments in
   versions of this draft prior to the first EMAILCORE version.  In many
   cases, those CREF comments were removed after issues were closed.
   All issues in this category have either been closed, sometimes
   because they have been reassigned to other documents and/or or
   replaced with other topics and, where appropriate, tickets.

G.7.1.  Issues with 521, 554, and 556 codes (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.8.  Note additional discussion started
   2022-05-18 may require reopening or a new ticket, see Appendix H.30.
   There is also a loose end noted with a CREF comment in Section 3.1

G.7.2.  SMTP Model, terminology, and relationship to RFC 5598 (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.29.

G.7.3.  Resolvable FQDNs and private domain names (closed)

   Several tickets listed, all appear to be closed.  See Appendix H.7.

G.7.4.  Possible clarification about mail transactions and transaction
        state (closed)

   Closed.  See Appendix H.5).

G.7.5.  Issues with mailing lists, aliases, and forwarding (closed)

   Closed.  See Appendix H.36.

G.7.6.  Requirements for domain name and/or IP address in EHLO (closed)

   RFC5321bis parts closed (see Appendix H.9).  Some work still to be
   done in A/S.

G.7.7.  Does the 'first digit only' and/or non-listed reply (c code text
        need clarification)? (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.10.

G.7.8.  Size limits (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.11

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 114]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

G.7.9.  Discussion of 'blind' copies and RCPT (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.26.

G.7.10.  Further clarifications needed to source routes? (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.12

G.7.11.  Should 1yz Be Revisited? (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.13

G.7.12.  Review Timeout Specifications (closed)

   To be discussed in A/S, see Appendix H.14.

G.7.13.  Possible SEND, SAML, SOML Loose End (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.15

G.7.14.  Abstract Update (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.16.

G.7.15.  Informative References to MIME and/or Message Submission
         (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.17

G.7.16.  Mail Transaction Discussion (closed)

   Probably duplicate of Ticket #11, see Appendix H.5

G.7.17.  Hop by hop Authentication and/or Encryption (closed)

   Closed (no action required in rfc5321bis), see Appendix H.18

G.7.18.  More Text About 554 Given 521, etc. (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.30.

G.7.19.  Minimum Lengths and Quantities (closed)

   All work that needs to be done in this area in this document appears
   to have been done.
   Closed, no ticket assigned, see Appendix H.31.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 115]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

G.8.  Enhanced Reply Codes and DSNs (closed)

   This is part of Ticket #40 and most of the topic should be covered in
   the A/S.  Treated as closed, see Appendix H.19.

G.9.  Revisiting Quoted Strings (closed)

   Closed.  See Appendix H.27.

G.10.  Internationalization (closed)

   Text in the document has been changed to make use of non-ASCII
   characters with extension more explicit.  Further discussion of these
   topics probably belongs in the A/S.
   Closed, see Appendix H.32.

G.11.  SMTP Clients, Servers, Senders, and Receivers (closed)

   Text has been adjusted.  Closed, see Appendix H.20.

G.12.  Extension Keywords Starting in 'X-' (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.21.

G.13.  Deprecating HELO (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.22.

G.14.  The FOR Clause in Trace Fields: Semantics, Security
       Considerations, and Other Issues (closed)

   Ticket #55, marked closed in issue tracker, 2023-02-13.  See
   Appendix H.39.

G.15.  Resistance to Attacks and Operational Necessity (closed)

   Closed, see Appendix H.23

G.16.  Mandatory 8BITMIME (closed)

   Closed (despite Ticket #40 interation), See Appendix H.25.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 116]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

G.17.  New tickets created between 2022-01-21 and 2022-03-01 (closed
       (all of them))

   To keep issues synchronized between this document and the tracker
   (now at <https://github.com/ietf-wg-emailcore/emailcore/
   issues?q=is%3Aopen+is%3Aissue>)
   a list of new issues added between the January 2022 interim and the
   end of the week before the cutoff for completing and posting draft-
   ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-10 are listed below.

   // Editor's note: there are redundancies below in listed section
   // numbers and references.  They are to be sure pointers remain
   // accurate if section numbers change.  They look silly, but are not
   // bugs.  Because all of Appendixes G and H will disappear before the
   // RFC Editor gets or starts processing the document, there is no
   // possibility of them turning into long-term problems.

   *  #58 Clarification of what is a domain name alias and who can
      substitute them (Closed 2022-05-19, see Appendix H.24)
   *  #59 Case sensitive commands?
      Closed.  See Appendix H.24)
   *  #60 Restricted-capability clients?
      Closed.  See Appendix H.24.
   *  #61 Explaining mailing lists.  Identified in tracker as duplicate
      of #12.  See Appendix H.24 and Appendix H.36 for more information.
   *  #62 null mx vs server domain in 4.2.4.2 (See Section 4.2.4.2)
      Closed.  See Appendix H.24.
   *  #63 VRFY in required commands in 4.5.1 (See Section 4.5.1).
      Changing this would also impact Section 3.5.1, Section 3.5.2,
      Section 3.5.3, and Section 7.3.
      Document adjusted per WG discussion through 2022-05-17.
      Closed.  See Appendix H.24

G.18.  Approval Required to Register an SMTP Service Extension with IANA
       (closed)

   Closed.  See Appendix H.34.

G.19.  Inconsistencies between rfc5321bis and IANA registry and related
       issues (closed)

   Closed with the rewrites to Section 8.1.1 in drafts -14 through -17.
   See Appendix H.33.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 117]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

G.20.  Side-effects of approval change for Service Extension from
       "Standards Track or IESG Approved Experimental" to "Specification
       Required" (closed)

   Fixed and/or overtaken by events with the rewrites to Section 8.1.1
   in -17.  See Appendix H.35.

G.21.  Appendix B and Message Submission (closed)

   No evidence of consensus in the WG to make further changes.  Was
   Ticket #75.  Closed; see Appendix H.38

G.22.  IANA Registration Model for Registries Other Than Service
       Extensions (Closed)

   Closed per note from Alexey on mailing list, 2023-02-13.  Was Ticket
   #76.  See Appendix H.37.

G.23.  Headers Inserted in Mail Transport (closed)

   Tentatively closed as part of the trace field cleanup.  The tickets
   have been closed so, presumably, so is this.  Tickets #81 and #7.
   See Appendix H.40.

G.24.  Describing the "Operational Requirements" Loopholes (tentatively
       closed)

   Alexey proposed closing this on 2023-03-21.  A suggestion was
   received on 2023-04-23 that has been largely incorporated, but, as of
   2023-12-10, the ticket has not been officially closed.  See
   Appendix H.41.

G.25.  Relocate paragraphs after the first out of Section 3.6.2 and to
       3.6.1 (tentatively closed)

   All but the first paragraph of Section 3.6.2 appear to belong at the
   end of Section 3.6.1 instead.
   Ticket #88.  See Appendix H.42

G.26.  Remove SHOULD requirement for use of reply text

   A requirement has been present since at least RFC 2821 that SMTP
   servers sending reply codes SHOULD use the text specified with them
   (Cf.  Section 4.2).  Alexey suggests "This requirement is hard to
   test compliance with" and should be dropped as a requirement.  The
   counter argument is that a principal goal of this specification is to
   provide guidance to implementers -- with compliance testing being
   secondary -- and the SHOULD is justified on that basis.  Of course,

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 118]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   if it is the case that "no one" follows that recommendation anyway,
   that would justify taking it out.

   See the message thread starting with
   <https://mailarchive.ietf.org/arch/msg/emailcore/xUCSrarl_-
   QDn4XRgTUolha_TSE> and the proposed text in Section 4.2.
   Ticket #89.

G.27.  Section 4.2.4.3 appears to impose a BCP 14 requirement on users

   Section 4.2.4.3 says "The user who originated the message SHOULD be
   able...".  It seems undesirable impose BCP 14-level requirements on
   users.  This should either be dropped to a "should" or restated as
   the requirement on servers as has been intended since at least RFC
   2821 where that statement appeared.

   See the message thread starting with
   <https://mailarchive.ietf.org/arch/msg/emailcore/YClG-
   kpxLjs9Ni3Ic1SIM67olC4> and the proposed text in Section 4.2.4.3.
   Ticket #90.

G.28.  Misplaced paragraph about special treatment in Section 4.4.3

   The last paragraph of Section 4.4.3 discusses special treatment cases
   after DATA if that command is not completely successful.  It does not
   seem to belong there.  Perhaps it should be moved to Section 3.3,
   making that section even longer relative to RFC stylistic conventions
   adopted when we started forbidding references to page numbers.

   See the message thread starting with
   <https://mailarchive.ietf.org/arch/msg/emailcore/
   F9omW9UodTAikTKLjBrWmmt1xA8>
   Ticket #91.

Appendix H.  Completed Items Moved from Appendix G

   [[RFC Editor: Please remove this section before publication.]]

   This appendix contains items identified as "closed" and moved from
   Appendix G (but referenced from there) to allow easier identification
   and tracking of open issues.  Note that the subsection names
   deliberately duplicate those of the earlier appendix.  It does not
   include the earlier errata items listed in Appendix I.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 119]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

H.1.  IP Address literals

   The specification is unclear about whether IP address literals,
   particularly IP address literals used as arguments to the EHLO
   command, are required to be accepted or whether they are allowed to
   be rejected as part of the general "operational necessity" exception.
   Some have suggested that rejection of them is so common as an anti-
   spam measure that the use of such literals should be deprecated
   entirely in the specification, others that the are still useful and
   used and/or that, whatever is said about IP address literals within
   an SMTP session (e.g., in MAIL or RCPT commands), they should
   continue to be allowed (and required) in EHLO.
   Ticket #1 (closed for rfc5321bis; issue for A/S).

H.2.  Repeated Use of EHLO

   While the specification says that an SMTP client's sending EHLO again
   after it has been issued (starting an SMTP session and treats it as
   if RSET had been sent (closing the session) followed by EHLO, there
   are apparently applications, at least some of them involving setting
   up of secure connections, in which the second EHLO is required and
   does not imply RSET.  Does the specification need to be adjusted to
   reflect or call out those cases?

   After extended discussion in October 2020, it appears that the
   easiest fix to these problems is to clarify the conditions for
   termination of a mail transaction in Section 3.3 and to clearly
   specify the effect of a second (or subsequent) EHLO command in
   Section 4.1.4.
   See also Appendix H.5.
   Ticket #2.  (closed - Both changes have been made in draft-ietf-
   emailcore-rfc5321bis-01).

H.3.  Meaning of "MTA" and Related Terminology

   A terminology issue has come up about what the term "MTA" actually
   refers to, a question that became at least slightly more complicated
   when we formalized RFC 6409 Submission Servers.  Does the document
   need to be adjusted to be more clear about this topic?  Note that the
   answer may interact with the question asked in Section 2 above.
   Possibly along the same lines, RFC 2821 changed the RFC 821
   terminology from "sender-SMTP" and "receiver-SMTP" to "SMTP client"
   and "SMTP server" respectively.  As things have evolved, it is
   possible that newer terminology is a source of confusion and that the
   terminology should be changed back, something that also needs
   discussion.
   Ticket #3 (Closed, note added rfc5321bis-11)

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 120]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

H.4.  Originator, or Originating System, Authentication (to A/S)

   Should RFC 5321bis address authentication and related issues or
   should Section 3.4.2 or other text be reshaped (in addition to or
   instead of the comment on that section) to lay a better foundation
   for such work, either in the context of mailing lists or more
   generally?
   This may interact with Erratum 4055 and Ticket #30 below.

H.5.  Possible clarification about mail transactions and transaction
      state

   Original CREF from Section 3.3 was
   [5321bis]: This section would be improved by being more specific
   about where mail transactions begin and end and then talking about
   "transaction state" here, rather than specific prior commands. --JcK
   and there should probably be a reference in Section 4.1.4.
   Ticket #11.  Closed 2022-05-26.

H.6.  Remove or deprecate the work-around from code 552 to 452

   The suggestion in Section 4.5.3.1.10 may have outlived its usefulness
   and/or be inconsistent with current practice.  Should it be removed
   and/or explicitly deprecated?
   SHOULD requirement removed.
   Ticket #5 (fixed and closed).

H.7.  Resolvable FQDNs and private domain names

   Several CREF comments on this subject were removed from Section 2.3.5
   prior to rfc5321bis-10.
   Tickets #9 (definition of domain name; not identified in tracker),
   #10 (meaning of "resolvable domain name"; closed 2021-06-12), and #41
   (closed -- no change 2021-04-05).

H.8.  Issues with 521, 554, and 556 codes

   See new Section 4.2.4.2.  More text may be needed, there or
   elsewhere, about choices of codes in response to initial opening and
   to EHLO, especially to deal with selective policy rejections.  In
   particular, should we more strongly discourage the use of 554 on
   initial opening.  And should we make up a 421 code (or a new 4yz
   code, perhaps 454) code for situations where the server is
   temporarily out of service?
   Ticket #6 (closed).

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 121]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

H.9.  Requirements for domain name and/or IP address in EHLO (mostly
      closed, some to A/S)

   Text in Section 4.1.4; change made in -05.
   Ticket #19 (was ticket #47 -- done in rfc5321bis, more in A/S).

H.10.  Does the 'first digit only' and/or non-listed reply code text
       need clarification?

   Resolved.  Text in Section 4.2 changed 2021-02-08 and CREF comment in
   Section 4.3.1 removed.

   Perhaps unresolved -- ongoing discussion on mailing list after IETF
   110.
   Ticket #13 (fixed and closed).

H.11.  Size limits

   Once a decision is made about line length rules for RFC 5322bis,
   review the size limit discussions in this document, particularly the
   CREF comment (Note in Draft) at the end of the introductory material
   to Section 4.5.3 to be sure this document says what we want it to
   say.  (See the additional question about minimum quantities, etc., in
   Appendix H.31.)
   Ticket #14 (closed - no action) and maybe Ticket #38 (to A/S).

H.12.  Further clarifications needed to source routes?

   The current text largely deprecates the use of source routes but
   suggests that servers continue to support them.
   Ticket #17 (Closed 20220125).

H.13.  Should 1yz Be Revisited?

   RFC 5321 depreciated the "positive preliminary reply" response code
   category with first digit "1", so that the first digit of valid SMTP
   response codes must be 2, 3, 4, or 5.  It has been suggested (see
   mail from Hector Santos with Subject "SMTP Reply code 1yz Positive
   Preliminary reply", March 5, 2020 12:56 -0500, on the SMTP list) that
   these codes should be reinstated to deal with some situations that
   became more plausible after 5321 was published.  Do we need to take
   this up again?
   Ticket #18 (no, closed).

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 122]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

H.14.  Review Timeout Specifications

   RFC 5321 (and its predecessors going back to 821) specify minimum
   periods for client and server to wait before timing out.  Are those
   intervals still appropriate in a world of faster processors and
   faster networks?  Should they be updated and revised?  Or should more
   qualifying language be added?
   Ticket #16.

H.15.  Possible SEND, SAML, SOML Loose End

   Per discussion (and Ticket #20), the text about SEND, SAML, and SOML
   has been removed from the main body of the document so that the only
   discussion of them now appears in Appendix F.6.  Per the editor's
   note in that appendix, is any further discussion needed?  WG
   conclusion was "no".
   Ticket #20 (closed)

H.16.  Abstract Update

   Does the Abstract need to be modified in the light of RFC 6409 or
   other changes?
   Ticket #52 (changes made; closed)

H.17.  Informative References to MIME and/or Message Submission

   Should RFC 2045 (MIME) and/or RFC 6409 (Message Submission) be
   referenced at the end of Section 1.2?  There is now a reference and
   brief discussion in that section.
   Ticket #53 (more general reference to the A/S, closed).

H.18.  Hop by hop Authentication and/or Encryption

   Should this document discuss hop-by-hop authentication or, for that
   matter, encryption?  (See CREF in Section 2.)
   Propose "No, it shouldn't" (20211101 conversation with Todd,
   reaffirmed 20220121 plenary)
   Ticket #50 (work with in A/S.  Closed).

H.19.  Enhanced Reply Codes and DSNs

   Enhanced Mail System Status Codes (RFC 3463) [12] were added to SMTP
   before RFC 5321 was published and are now, together with a
   corresponding registry [50], widely deployed and in extensive use in
   the network.  Similar, the structure and extensions options for
   Delivery Status Notifications [40] is implemented, deployed, and in
   wide use.  Is it time to fold all or part of those mature
   specifications into the SMTP spec or at least to mention and

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 123]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   normatively reference them?  And, as an aside, do those specs need
   work or, if they are kept separate, is it time to move them to
   Internet Standard?

   At least one of the current references to RFC 3463 indicates that it
   SHOULD be used.  That presumably makes the reference normative
   because one needs that specification to know what the present
   document requires.  It has been moved in the -03 version of this
   draft, but, unless it is moved to Internet Standard, it will require
   downref treatment.
   Part of Ticket #40.

H.20.  SMTP Clients, Servers, Senders, and Receivers

   RFC 821 used the terms "SMTP-sender" and "SMTP-receiver".  In RFC
   2821 (and hence in 5321), we switched that to "client" and "server"
   (See the discussion in Section 1.2).  In part because a relay is a
   server and then a client (in some recent practice, even interleaving
   the two functions by opening the connection to the next host in line
   and sending commands before the incoming transaction is complete),
   RFC 5321 continues to use the original terminology in some places.
   Should we revisit that usage, possibly even returning to consistent
   use of the original terminology?
   After discussion at IETF 113, small change made to Section 1.2.
   Ticket #3 (closed).

H.21.  Extension Keywords Starting in 'X-'

   Section 2.2.2 contains a discussion of SMTP keywords starting in "X".
   Given general experience with such things and RFC 6648, is there any
   reason to not deprecate that practice entirely and remove that text?
   If we do so, should the former Section 4.1.5 be dropped or rewritten
   to make clear this is an obsolete practice?
   Material formerly in 4.1.5 eliminated in rfc5321bis-06.
   Ticket #42 (resolved with -06 and closed).

H.22.  Deprecating HELO

   RFC 5321 (and 2821 before it) very carefully circle around the status
   of HELO, even recommending its use as a fallback when EHLO is sent
   and a "command not recognized" response is received.  We are just a
   few months short of 20 years; is it time to deprecate the thing and
   clean out some or all of that text?  And, given a recent (4Q2020)
   discussion on the EMAILCORE list, should EHLO be explicitly bound to
   SMTP over TCP with the older transports allowed only with HELO?
   While those questions may seem independent, separating them is fairly
   hard given the way the text is now constructed.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 124]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Resolved 2021-01-19: No change
   Ticket #43 (closed).

H.23.  Resistance to Attacks and Operational Necessity

   Section 7.8 is often cited as allowing an exception to the rules of
   the specification for reasons of operational necessity, not just
   attack resistance.  I (JcK) believe the broader interpretation was
   intended by YAM (the section was new in RFC 5321).  Recommendation:
   change the title to explicitly include "Local Operational
   Requirements" and add text to indicate that attack resistance is not
   the only possible source of such requirements.
   Ticket #48 (done, closed)

H.24.  New tickets created between 2022-01-21 and 2022-03-01 and
       subsequently closed.

   *  #58 Clarification of what is a domain name alias and who can
      substitute them (see Section 2.3.5).  Closed 2022-05-19.

   *  #59 Case sensitive commands?  (See Section 2.4).  Closed
      2022-05-26.

   *  #60 Restricted-capability clients?  (See Section 3.3).  Text in
      rfc5321bis-11 has been adjusted slightly in the hope of clarifying
      what is going on.  Mailing list discussion thread:
      <https://mailarchive.ietf.org/arch/msg/emailcore/
      XtKLDF7MezR4FUd22x8OFWT-f5k/> Closed 2022-07-15.

   *  #61 Explaining mailing lists (See Section 3.4.2).  Note that
      Section also interacts with Tickets #4, #30, #34, Appendix H.4,
      #12, and Appendix H.36.  Tracker indicates this is a duplicate of
      Ticket #12
      Closed 2022-08-22.

   *  #62 null mx vs server domain in 4.2.4.2 (See Section 4.2.4.2)
      Per IETF113, no change, but was reopened 2022 May with additional
      comments.  Closed again 2022-08-22.

H.25.  Mandatory 8BITMIME

   There was extensive discussion on the mailing list in October 2021
   about messages with and without 8-bit (i.e., octets with the leading
   on) content and a tentative conclusion that support for 8BITMIME
   should be required.  If that is the WG's conclusion, we need to
   figure out what to say and where to say it.  SHOULD added to
   Section 2.4 in rfc5321bis-10.
   Anything more probably goes to A/S.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 125]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Ticket #64.  Marked as duplicate of part of Ticket #40 in tracker on
   2022-07-04 and therefore closed.

H.26.  Discussion of 'blind' copies and RCPT

   CREF comment that originally appeared in Section 7.2 (left over from
   2007) suggested deleting "especially" and "the full set of" --
   copying the first one can be as harmful as copying all of them, at
   least without verifying that the addresses do appear in the headers.
   That fix has been applied.  The WG also discussed the appropriateness
   of continuing to use "blind" and concluded that the damage caused by
   changing terminology would outweigh any advantages.
   Ticket #15.

H.27.  Revisiting Quoted Strings (reclassified)

   Recent discussions both in and out of the IETF have highlighted
   instances of non-compliance with the specification of a Local-part
   consisting of a Quoted-string, whether any content of QcontentSMTP
   that actually requires special treatment consists of qtextSMTP,
   quoted-pairSMTP, or both.  Section 4.1.2 (of RFC 5321, repeated
   above) ends with a few paragraphs of warnings (essentially a partial
   applicability statement), the first of which cautions against
   cleverness with either Quoted-string or case sensitivity as a threat
   to interoperability.

   The Quoted-string portion of that discussion has apparently been
   widely not read or ignored.  Do we need to do something else?  If we
   do an Applicability Statement, would it be useful to either reference
   the discussion in this document from there or to move the discussion
   there and reference it (normatively?) from here?

   There has been a separate discussion of empty quoted strings in
   addresses, i.e., whether the <qtextSMTP> production should be
   required to included at least one non-whitespace character.  It is
   separate from this issue but would be further impacted or distorted
   from the considerations identified in this Section.

   Text modified in -07 and further modified in -11.
   Ticket #21.  Closed in rfc5321bis-12 as noted in rfc5321bis-11.  May
   also interact with Ticket #35 (which is an A/S issue).

H.28.  Clarify where the protocol stands with respect to submission and
       TLS issues (reclassified)

   1.  submission on port 587

   2.  submission on port 465

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 126]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   3.  TLS relay on a port different from 25 (whenever)

   4.  Recommendations about general use of transport layer (hop by hop)
       security, particularly encryption including consideration of RFC
       8314.

   Reclassified to A/S issue.
   Apparently no ticket originally assigned although related to Ticket
   #53 and Appendix H.17.
   Ticket #80 for A/S issue.

H.29.  SMTP Model, terminology, and relationship to RFC 5598

   CREF comments addressing this subject that appeared in (much?)
   earlier versions of this document removed from Section 2,
   Section 2.3.10.  The second bullet item in the introductory portion
   of Appendix G may also be relevant.
   No specific tickets were assigned but most of all of these issues
   have been discussed and changes made as needed.  Closed.

H.30.  More Text About 554 Given 521, etc.

   Does reply code 554 need additional or different explanation in the
   light of the addition of the new 521 code and/or the new text in
   5321bis Section 4.2.4.2)?  (Former CREF after RCPT in Section 4.2.3
   removed in earlier version.)
   All needed text has been adjusted.  Closed, no ticket assigned.

H.31.  Minimum Lengths and Quantities

   Are the minimum lengths and quantities specified in Section 4.5.3
   still appropriate or do they need adjusting?  CREF discussing that
   issue appeared in earlier drafts.  There might also be a potential
   interaction with the proposed LIMITS SMTP extension (draft-freed-
   smtp-limits) should that ever be adopted.
   Closed after discussion, no ticket assigned.

H.32.  Internationalization

   RFC 5321 was completed long before work on internationalization of
   email addresses and headers (other than by use of encoded words in
   MINE).  In particular, it came before the work of the EAI WG that led
   to the SMTPUTF8 specifications, specifically RFCs 6530ff.  The second
   explanatory paragraph at the end of Section 4.1.2 ("Systems MUST NOT
   define mailboxes ...") is an extremely strong prohibition against the
   use of non-ASCII characters in SMTP commands and the requirements
   about message content in Section 2.3.1 an equally strong one for
   content.  Would it be appropriate to add something like "in the

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 127]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   absence of relevant extensions" there?  Also, given [mis]behavior
   seen in the wild, does that paragraph (or an A/S) need an explicit
   caution about SMTP servers or clients assuming they can apply the
   popular web convention of using %NN sequences as a way to encode non-
   ASCII characters (<pct-encoded> in RFC 3986) and assuming some later
   system will interpret it as they expect?  Would it be appropriate to
   add an Internationalization Considerations section to the body of
   this document if only for the purpose of pointing people elsewhere?

   More broadly, while the EAI WG's extensions for non-ASCII headers and
   addresses are explicitly out of scope for the EMAILCORE WG (at least
   for 5321bis (and 5322bis), those documents make assumptions and
   interpretations of the core documents.  Are there areas in which
   5321bis could and should be clarified to lay a more solid foundation
   for the EAI/SMTPUTF8 work and, if so, what are they?

   Text added in rfc5321bis-11, Section 4.1.2 and in rfc5321bis-14.
   Additional discussion on this subject belongs in the A/S.
   Ticket #78 for cautions about encodings -- assigned to A/S, not
   rfc5321bis.  Ticket #79 for I18n Considerations Section, also in A/S.
   Also mentioned in Ticket #40.

H.33.  Inconsistencies between rfc5321bis and IANA registry and related
       issues

   The descriptions and specifications for the IANA SMTP-related Mail
   Registries (<https://www.iana.org/assignments/mail-parameters/mail-
   parameters.xhtml>), and the reference from the Service Extension
   registry portion of that collection back to RFC 5321 are incorrect
   and/or confusing.  Also a registry must be specified for Additional
   Registered Clauses.

   *  Ticket #67 (Additional Clauses)
   *  Ticket #69 (inconsistencies)
   *  Ticket #70 (section reference)
   *  Ticket #71 (SMTP Registration template should have a field
      specifying level of approval)
   *  Ticket #72 (Add a field to SMTP registration template about
      whether the extension is suitable for SMTP Submission)

   Closed with the rewrites to Section 8.1.1 in drafts -14 through -17.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 128]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

H.34.  Approval Required to Register an SMTP Service Extension with IANA

   RFC 5321 and its predecessors required that SMTP Service Extensions
   be registered with IANA and that they be documented in "Standards-
   Track or Experimental RFCs specifically approved by the IESG for this
   purpose".  Sentiment in the IETF has shifted away from that level of
   approval and the work it requires toward trying to be sure the
   relevant keywords are documented and registered to prevent ambiguity
   and naming conflicts.  Consequently the requirement is being changed
   to Specification Required.
   See also Appendix H.33 and Appendix H.35.

   Closed with adoption of two-option model in -16 and -17.
   Ticket #56.

H.35.  Side-effects of approval change for Service Extension from
       "Standards Track or IESG Approved Experimental" to "Specification
       Required"

   There are more of these but, at least, the change (and text in RFC
   8126) requires specifying a Change Controller because it is no longer
   obviously the IETF/IESG.

   (Some text tentatively added to Section 2.2.2 in rfc5321bis-13.  Then
   that was revised and the important parts of it incorporated into the
   IANA registration instructions Section 8.1.1 in rfc5321bis-14.)
   Ticket #68.  Fixed and/or overtaken by events with the rewrites to
   Section 8.1.1 in -17.

H.36.  Issues with mailing lists, aliases, and forwarding

   From the former CREF comment in Section 3.4.2: May also want to note
   forwarding as an email address portability issue.  Note that, if
   changes are made in this area, they should be kept consistent with
   the description and discussion of the 251 and 551 codes in
   Section 4.2 and Section 3.5 as well as Section 3.4.1 to avoid
   introducing inconsistencies.  In addition, there are some terminology
   issues about the use of the term "lists", identified in erratum 1820,
   that should be reviewed after any more substantive changes are made
   to the relevant sections.
   Ticket #12 and Ticket #34 (Ticket #34/ erratum 1820 resolved in -06
   and closed).  (Ticket #61 identified in tracker as duplicate of
   Ticket #12.)
   Closed.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 129]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

H.37.  IANA Registration Model for Registries Other Than Service
       Extensions

   The WG decided to shift the registration model for Service Extensions
   from "Standards Track or IESG-approved Experimental" to
   "Specification Required".  No decisions have been made yet about
   other mail-related registries established by this document in
   Section 8.1, specifically the "VIA link types" and "WITH protocol
   types" discussed in Section 8.1.3, the additional clauses for
   "Received:" headers discussed in Section 8.1.4, and the IP address
   literal indicators discussed in Section 8.1.2.  All three sets will
   be left unchanged, and this item closed unless other decisions are
   made, presumably before IETF 115.

   Post-IETF 115 update (for rfc5321bis-16): Slide for that meeting
   proposed changing link and protocol types to IETF Review.  No
   conclusion on mailing list yet; see "Editor's Analysis"
   (<https://mailarchive.ietf.org/arch/msg/emailcore/
   NVd2BdnLkURNjLaSG3S6rqXJY0s>).  CREF comment added to Section 8.1.3
   above.  Additional clauses and IP address literals were not
   discussed.

   Further update after 2022-12-07 Interim meeting (partially reflected
   on rfc5321bis-17): No change to IP address literal registrations.
   Additional clauses still under discussion.
   Ticket #76.  Closed per email from Alexey 2023-02-13.

H.38.  Appendix B and Message Submission

   Appendix B was written long ago and does not distinguish very
   carefully from the case where an MSA is involved from direct MUA-MTA
   communications.  On the other hand, the situation it describes cannot
   arise with a conforming message submission system.  Should it be
   rewritten and, if so, how much?

   Change made to explicitly reference the Submission Server
   specification.
   Ticket #75.  Closed 2023-02-20 after there was no clear consensus in
   the WG (or even significant discussion) about the need for additional
   text or what it should be.

H.39.  The FOR Clause in Trace Fields: Semantics, Security
       Considerations, and Other Issues

   Marked closed in issue tracker, 2023-02-13.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 130]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   The FOR clause in time-stamp ("Received:") fields is seriously under-
   defined.  It is optional, the syntax is clear, but its semantics and
   use, while perhaps obvious from content and the application of common
   sense, have never been defined ("never" going back to 821).  Do we
   want to better define it?  Is there any chance that a definition
   would invalid existing, conforming and sensible, implementations?  If
   we do want to define semantics, draft text and advice as to where it
   should go are invited.

   (Paragraph added 2021-08-18, draft -04)
   In particular, recent discussions point strongly to the need for a
   statement to the effect that the value of the for clause must contain
   one of the addresses that caused the message to be routed to the
   recipient of this message copy (thanks Ned), that no more than one
   address can appear, and that showing one address when there are
   multiple RCPT commands may be a security and/or privacy issue (thanks
   Ned and Viktor and see <https://mailarchive.ietf.org/arch/msg/ietf-
   smtp/hMkwHT-6bi_AwYIxbFJBX5pqjiA>).  More detailed or specific
   guidance, including case analysis, are probably material for the A/s,
   but that is obviously up to the WG.

   Note the existing discussions in Section 7.2 and Section 7.6 as they
   may need adjustment, or at least cross-references, especially if FOR
   is more precisely defined.

   There is probably an error in Section 7.6.  Its last sentence implies
   a possible interaction between messages with multiple recipients and
   the FOR clause of trace fields.  However, because the syntax of the
   FOR clause only allows one Mailbox (or Path), it isn't clear if that
   statement is meaningful.  Should it be revised to discuss other
   situations in which including FOR might not be desirable from a
   security or privacy standpoint?  (See above -- this paragraph
   deliberately not changed in -04 through -11).
   Ticket #55.  Marked closed in issue tracker, 2023-02-13.

H.40.  Headers Inserted in Mail Transport

   The process of revising Section 4.4 for rfc5321bis-14 and explicitly
   treating "Return-path:" as a trace field in this spec raised a
   possibly-interesting problem.  To date at least, the only mail
   headers that are inserted by SMTP clients or servers and specified by
   this document are trace fields, i.e., "Received:" and "Return-path."
   Is that a principle?  Should we say that SMTP systems have no
   business inserting headers other than those that provide trace
   information?  Or are there other types of header fields we can see
   SMTP systems inserting and, if so, what are they?"  See also the
   former Section 8.1.5 and Section 4.4.4.
   Ticket #81 about how additional trace fields are registered.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 131]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   Also Ticket #7 Better definition for trace header fields.
   Tentatively closed as part of the trace field cleanup, July 2023,
   draft -19.

H.41.  Describing the "Operational Requirements" Loopholes

   The discussion in Section 7.8 and Section 7.9, and the pointers to
   them from Section 6.2 and elsewhere essentially provide the basis for
   implementations to deviate, in multiple ways, from the intent of RFC
   5321 and 5321bis while claiming conformance.  Is the present text
   what we want?  Should it be made more explicit about what is allowed
   and what isn't (whether either is possible is obviously part of the
   question)?  If we intend to address those issues in the A/S (not just
   the limits question which is already there), do we want explicit
   forward pointers to it in the existing sections?

   (This topic mentioned on the mailing list for the first time in
   <https://mailarchive.ietf.org/arch/msg/emailcore/
   Zv7XtCUPavpacrLslgDiK7M-FJ8 >, 2023-01-15).  After a call for closing
   the ticket was made 2023-03-07 if no more input was received, a
   suggestion was received on 2023-04-23 that has been largely
   incorporated.  No more comments received.
   Ticket #82.

H.42.  Relocate paragraphs after the first out of Section 3.6.2 and to
       3.6.1 (closed)

   All but the first paragraph of Section 3.6.2 appear to belong at the
   end of Section 3.6.1 instead.

   Despite dating from RFC 5321 or earlier, this appears to be a simple
   editorial improvement.  Changed.
   Ticket #88.

Appendix I.  Detailed Change Descriptions and Logs

   [[RFC Editor: Please remove the first three subsections of this
   section before publication.  The last subsection, including its
   title, will then become the entire final form of the appendix]]

I.1.  RFC 5321 Errata Summary

   This document addresses the following errata filed against RFC 5321
   since its publication in October 2008 [63].  More details on each of
   these can be found at <https://www.rfc-editor.org/errata/rfc5321>.
   As with the previous appendix, ticket numbers included below
   reference <https://github.com/ietf-wg-emailcore/emailcore/issues>

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 132]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   1683  ABNF error. (closed) Section 4.4
      Ticket #23 (fixed, closed).

   4198  Description error. (closed) Section 4.2.
      RESOLVED 2020-12-14, ticket #24 (closed).

   2578  Syntax description error. (closed) Section 4.1.2
      Ticket #25 (fixed, closed)

   1543  Wrong code in description (closed) Section 3.8
      Ticket #26 (fixed, closed)

   4315  ABNF - IPv6 Section 4.1.3 (closed).  Former description in the
      document body was: [5321bis]The IPv6 syntax has been adjusted
      since 5321 was published (the erratum mentions RFC 5952, but RFC
      6874 and draft-carpenter-6man-rfc6874bis should also be
      considered).  See the rewritten form and the comment in the
      section cited in the previous sentence, at least for the RFC 5952
      issues.  See https://www.rfc-editor.org/errata/eid4315
      Ticket #27 (closed 2021-01-19).

   5414  ABNF for Quoted-string (closed) Section 4.1.2
      Ticket #22 (fixed, closed).

   1851  Location of text on unexpected close Section 4.1.1.5 (closed).
      Text moved per email 2020-12-31.
      Ticket #28 (fixed, closed).

   3447  Use of normative language (e.g., more "MUST"s), possible
      confusion in some sections Section 4.4.
      Ticket #7

   5711 (closed)  Missing leading spaces in example Appendix D.3.
      As of 2021-03-15, both the txt and html-ized versions of draft-
      ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-02 were showing identical output for
      both parts of the example, so the problem appears to be OBE at
      worst.
      Ticket #29 (closed 2021-03-16)

   4055 (closed)  Erratum claims the the description of SPF and DKIM is
      wrong.  It is not clear what 5321bis should really say about them,
      but the current text probably needs work (or dropping, which is
      what the proposed erratum suggests).
      Text changed; ticket should probably be closed after WG reviews
      -04.
      Ticket #30 (resolved and closed).

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 133]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

I.2.  Changes from RFC 5321 (published October 2008) to the initial
      (-00) version of this draft

   1.   Acknowledgments section (Section 9) trimmed back and then
        revised for new document.

   2.   Introductory paragraph to Appendix F extended to make it clear
        that these features were deprecated a long time ago and really
        should not be in use any more.

   3.   Adjusted some language to clarify that source routes really,
        really, should not be used or depended upon.

   4.   IPv6 address syntax replaced by a copy of the IPv6 URI syntax
        and a note added.

   5.   Production index added as a first step in tying all productions
        to their sources.  As part of the effort to make the document
        more easily navigable, table of contents entries have been
        created for the individual command descriptions.

   6.   Clarified the relationship between the SMTP "letters, digits,
        and hyphens" and DNS "preferred name syntax" (Section 2.3.5).

   7.   Revised the reply code sections to add new 521 and 556 codes,
        clarify relationships, and be explicit about the requirement for
        clients to rely on first digits rather than the sequences in
        Section 4.3.2.

   8.   In conjunction with the above, explicitly obsolete RFCs 1846 and
        7504

   9.   Incorporated a correction reflecting Errata ID 2578.

   10.  Some small editorial changes made to eliminate redundant
        statements that were very close together.  Other, equally small,
        editorial changes have been made to improve grammar or clarity.

   11.  A few questions, marked "[[5321bis Editor's Note:", or "[[Note
        in Draft" have been added for the group to resolve.  Other
        questions, especially those in the errata summary, are simply
        included in narrative comments in CREFs.

   12.  Checked and rationalized "response" (to a command) and "reply
        code" terminology.  One can talk about a "999 response" but only
        a "999 reply code".  There is no such thing as a "response
        code".

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 134]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   13.  Added note about length limit on mailbox names ("email
        addresses").

   14.  Added an "errata summary" subsection to this change log/
        comparison to 5321 in this Appendix.  The entire Appendix will,
        of course, disappear at the time of RFC publication unless
        someone wants to make a strong case for retaining it.

   15.  Rationalized CREFs to 2821, 5321, 5321bis etc.; added note to
        readers below the Abstract.

   16.  Temporarily added a "Note on Reading This Working Draft" after
        the Abstract.

I.3.  Changes Among Versions of rfc5321bis

I.3.1.  Changes from draft-klensin-rfc5321bis-00 (posted 2012-12-02) to
        -01

   Substantively, these two versions differ only by suppression of the
   CREF and other discussion associated with the evolution from RFC 2821
   to RFC 5321.  That change includes an update to the document's Note
   to Readers, the date, the file name, and the addition of this change
   log subsection.

I.3.2.  Changes from draft-klensin-rfc5321bis-01 (20191203) to -02

   *  Minor clarifications to improve text, e.g., addition of NOOP to
      the list of non-mail transaction examples in Section 4.1.4.

   *  Added topics exposed in the ietf-smtp list and the IETF list
      "dogfood" discussion during December 2019 and an index listing of
      substantive issues identified only in CREFs in the prior draft as
      a new Appendix G.

I.3.3.  Changes from draft-klensin-rfc5321bis-02 (2019-12-27) to -03

   *  Added more text to Appendix H.8 to specifically call out the
      session-opening policy issues surrounding these codes.

   *  Added discussion of "1yz" reinstatement in Appendix H.13.

   *  Added discussion of timeouts in Appendix H.14.

   *  Added subsection on Enhanced Status Codes and DSNs to the
      outstanding issues list Appendix H.19.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 135]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   *  Replaced reference to RFC 1652 (8BITMIME) with the Internet
      Standard version, RFC 6152.

   *  With help from cketti, clarified the ABNF productions whose
      terminals appear in other documents.

   *  Added discussions of Quoted-string, Internationalization, and
      client-server versus sender-receiver terminology to Appendix G.

   *  Added note to the Abstract.

I.3.4.  Changes from draft-klensin-rfc5321bis-03 (2020-07-02) to draft-
        ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-00

   *  Added a paragraph about non-null quoted strings to Appendix H.27.

   *  Added an explicit pointer to email insecurity and TLS to
      Appendix H.28.  Inspired by Ben Kaduk's comment on the WG Charter,
      2020-09-09.

   *  Converted document from individual to emailcore WG effort.

I.3.5.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-00 (2020-10-06) to
        -01

   *  Editorial: Corrected "blackslash" to "backslash"

   *  Rewrote the introduction to Appendix G slightly to reflect the
      creation of the EMAILCORE WG.

   *  Applied fixes for repeated use of EHLO.  See Appendix H.2.

   *  Added two new questions, one about "X" extensions (Appendix H.21)
      and one about the status of HELO (Appendix H.22).

   *  Removed mention of SEND, SAML, SOML from the main body of the text
      (Ticket #20).

   *  Added a warning about side effects to Appendix H.36.

   *  Added ticket numbers to descriptions of issues and changes,
      adjusted some text so relationships would be more clear, and added
      subsections to the Appendix G and H lists to pick up on tickets
      that were not easily identified in those sections of with the
      text.

   *  Made several additions to the Index, including one to deal with
      SEND et al., as above.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 136]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

I.3.6.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-01 (2020-12-25) to
        -02

   *  Corrected discussion mailing list to point to emailcore@ietf.org
      in the introductory note.

   *  Added new subsection(s) to Appendix G to reflect newly discovered
      issues.

   *  Changed "as discussed in" references in Section 4.5.5 per ticket
      #45.

   *  Corrected a misleading use of the term "mailbox" in Section 3.3.

   *  Changed descriptions of use of first digit in replies per ticket
      #13.  See Appendix H.10.

   *  Moved paragraph per ticket #28, erratum 1851.

   *  Added more clarifying cross-references, clarified some CREFs, and
      cleaned out some of those that no longer seemed relevant.

   *  Removed "updates 1123" is unnecessary and obsolete.

   *  Updated several references.

I.3.7.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-02 (2021-02-21) to
        -03

   *  Editorial: Fixed some instances of constructions like "RCPT TO
      command".  The name of the command is RCPT.  Sloppy editing in
      2008.

   *  Added text and cross-references to clarify the role of 452 and 552
      in "too many recipients" situations.

   *  Added Appendix H.23 to discuss changes to better reflect
      "operational necessity" issue.

   *  Added detail for erratum 5711, ticket #29.

   *  Added new subsections of Appendix G.7 to keep some previously-
      unnoted CREF notes from getting lost.  Also removed some CREFs
      that were notes on changes made before the WG was created or
      appeared to no longer have value and trimmed or rewrote some of
      the remaining ones.

   *  More discussion of Ticket #13, See Appendix H.10.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 137]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   *  Identified Ticket #41 as closed.  See Appendix Appendix H.7; notes
      removed from Section 2.3.5.

   *  "SHOULD" requirement for interpreting 552 "too many recipients"
      removed from Section 4.5.3.1.10, explanation added, and text
      cleaned up.  Also removed the parenthetical historical notes on
      the return code definitions in Section 4.2.  See Appendix H.6.
      (Ticket #5)

   *  Modified Appendix H.19 to add a note about the normative status of
      RFC 3463 and moved that reference.

   *  Several clarifications to initiation and termination of mail
      transactions in Section 4.1.4.

   *  Several additional minor editorial improvements.

   *  Note for drafts -03 and -04 only, modified somewhat for -05 but
      outdated from -06 forward: Some issues are still outstanding:
      Notes were posted to the list on 2021-07-09 about tickets #7
      (5322bis issue?), #10 , #14 (closed), #20 (closed), #30 (closed),
      and #42 (closed).  Even though some comments about them appeared
      in the subsequent day or so, there appears to have been
      insufficient time for discussions to stabilize sufficiently for
      changes to be included in this version of the I-D.

I.3.8.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-03 (2021-07-10) to
        -04

   *  Clarified that the "period" in <CRLF>.<CRLF> is really the ASCII
      one in Section 3.3.

   *  Several other small editorial corrections.

   *  Added several notes about the possible need to add text to reflect
      the presence of MSAs and to clarify whether MUAs send messages
      directly to MTAs or whether, in that case, the MUAs are just
      incorporating MSA functions.

   *  Added new text to Appendix H.39 reflecting discussions of the
      Received...FOR issue.

   *  Adjusted discussion of erratum 4315 (Ticket #27) to reflect more
      recent IPv6 syntax developments.

   *  Adjusted discussion of the various "mail not accepted" codes,
      rewrote Section 4.2.4.2, annotated and inserted cross-references
      in relevant response code descriptions and (tentatively)

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 138]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

      identified this document as obsoleting RFC 7505.  Editor's guess,
      reinforced by a brief conversation with John Levine (lead author
      of 7505), is that we should incorporate text as needed and
      obsolete it.  The changes include replacing the reference to the
      "nullMX" I-D with RFC 7505, which I am appalled that neither I nor
      anyone else noticed earlier.  Cf. Appendix H.8, Section 4.2.4.2,
      and Ticket #6.

I.3.9.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-04 (2021-10-03) to
        -05

   *  Took a first step toward rewriting and updating the introductory
      material.  It is only a first step; suggestions welcome.

   *  Minor editorial fixes.

   *  Correct text about domain name checking in Section 4.1.4, probably
      fixing ticket #19.  See CREF added there.

   *  Added Appendix H.25 a placeholder for the 8BITMIME discussion and
      possible action.

   *  Additional changes to the description and organization of trace
      field materials.  Intended to resolve the 5321bis part of Ticket
      #7.

   *  Remaining patch to SEND, etc., discussion in Appendix F.6 applied
      and CREF removed.

   *  Removed discussion of "X-" and edited associated text.  The fix
      may or may not be sufficient to resolve Ticket #42 (later closed).

   *  Verified that the problems of getting four-level sections (e.g.,
      "4.1.1.1" and other command-specific ones) into the table of
      contents and the index reflecting page numbers still exist and
      updated the introductory note.

I.3.10.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-05 (2021-10-24) to
         -06

   *  Finished making changes for "X-" and commands starting in "X".
      Changes made in -05 were incomplete.  This should allow closing
      Ticket #42.

   *  Removed spurious "for use in delivery notifications" from 3.6.2.
      Was just a pasting-type error.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 139]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   *  Changed "In other words" to "In particular" in Section 2.3.5 per
      Ticket #10 and July 2021 mailing list discussion.  Removed
      associated CREF.

   *  Converted to xml2rfc v3 (thanks to John Levine for doing the hard
      parts) and then modified the introductory note accordingly.

   *  Started reworking the Abstract -- see revised CREF there.

   *  Rewrote Section 2.3.3 slightly to note the existence of submission
      servers and removed the CREF.

   *  Updated Appendix H.18 and slightly modified CREF note in Section 2
      -- proposed to not get 5321bis involved with this (Ticket #50).

   *  Rewrote parts of Section 3.4.2 to clarify text and respond to
      Ticket #34.

   *  Inserted suggested text info CREF at end of Section 1.2.  Comments
      welcome.  Soon.

I.3.11.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-06 (2021-11-07) to
         -07

   *  Reviewed closed tickets and discussion with co-chairs after IETF
      112 and updated text.  Sections or items that are, according to
      the ticket list, completely closed have been identified by
      "(closed)" in or near their titles.

   *  Changed the suggestion for references to other documents mentioned
      in G.7.14 and Section 1.2 to actual text.  Cleaned things up and,
      per note from Alexey 2021-11-17, have marked Ticket #53 as closed.

   *  New text added and old text replaced about quotes in
      Section 4.1.2, text rearranged and edited a bit per Appendix H.27,
      and CREF added about alternatives.  Changes reflect mailing list
      comments through

   *  Last sentence (about source routing) removed from Section 2.1.
      Also adjusted text in Section 3.3, Section 4.1.1.3 but work is
      still needed there (see new CREFs in that section) and
      Section 6.1.  The former Appendix C and references to it have been
      removed, leaving a placeholder to avoid changing subsequent
      appendix numbering before IETF Last Call (and maybe its
      completion) No changes have yet been made to Appendix F.2 but it
      is likely to require some work in the next version of the
      document.  This is entirely about Ticket #17, which should not be
      closed until that appendix is updated.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 140]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

I.3.12.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-07 (2021-12-04) to
         -08

   Other than the partial cleanup for "forwarding" and "aliasing" and
   miscellaneous editorial fixes and corrections (including cleaning out
   unused references), changes in this version reflect the conclusions
   of the EMAILCORE interim meeting held 2021-12-09.  References to
   "slides" are to the deck at https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/slides-
   interim-2021-emailcore-01-sessa-chairs-slides/ and the minutes at
   https://notes.ietf.org/notes-emailcore-interim-dec-2021

   *  (Slides 9 through 12): Removed source route examples from
      Section 4.1.1.3 and added a new paragraph explaining what happened
      to them.  For slides 11 and 12, see below for more general
      Appendix F.2 discussion.
      (Cf Appendix H.12 and Ticket #17.)

   *  (Slides 13 through 14): Domain names, Section 2.3.5.  Removed
      "resolvable".  Changed "alias" to "host alias" (although, after
      looking at the actual text, the intent seems clear from the CNAME
      label comment and, of course, the term "host" has been
      controversial in DNS circles and the minutes are not clear on the
      desirability of this change).  Inserted "MUST" for the FQDN.  A
      cross-reference to the domain name discussion in this section has
      been added to Section 4.1.1.1 in an attempt to resolve that
      discussion.
      In going carefully through this material, it became obvious that
      the discussions in Section 2.3.5 and Section 5 were confusing and
      somewhat redundant.  Those sections have been rewritten to clarify
      intent, hint that extensions may modify (or have modified) a few
      of the rules, improve cross-references, and remove redundant text.
      Domain name issues are still under discussion on the WG mailing
      list as of 2021-12-18 and it is possible that the above changes
      may have introduced new issues, so additional changes are
      possible.
      (Cf target="G-domain"/> and Tickets #9 and maybe #10.)

   *  Aliasing and forwarding:
      Consolidated former sections 3.4 and 3.9 into a new Section 3.4,
      making them subsections.  The new subsection probably still needs
      work and maybe an introductory paragraph, but even bringing the
      two subsections together may reduce some sources of confusion
      identified on the mailing list.  Added cross-reference to security
      considerations from the new Section 3.4.1.

   All other issues discussed during the interim appear to be unresolved
   and were deferred to the mailing list.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 141]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   As what should be the third and final step in deprecation of source
   routes and removal of them from the main text, the appendix that
   discusses them (Appendix F.2) has been rewritten, adjusting language
   and incorporating some materials from the former Appendix C.

I.3.13.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-08 (2021-12-31) to
         -09

   *  Multiple small editorial changes.

   *  Started tuning Appendix I.2 preparatory to an actual "Changes
      from" section.

   *  Moved and rewrote a paragraph that seemed to be out of place from
      Section 4.4.1 to Section 4.1.1.3 per November discussion.  See the
      note in the latter section for discussion.

   *  Removed "for initial submission of messages" from Section 2.3.5
      and changed "may" to "MAY" in the last bullet point there, per
      Interim.  Removed comment/ Editor's Note from that section:
      further instructions and evidence of consensus needed to do
      anything additional with it.
      Ticket #9

   *  In Section 3.4.2, rewrote the first sentence to make it
      descriptive rather than normative.  Also removed the last sentence
      of that paragraph.  Both per the editor's understanding of the
      Interim's conclusions, but the latter was put in because of
      problems with people thinking changing the argument to the MAIL
      command also required changing "From:" in the headers, so this
      should be carefully reviewed on list.  Comment removed from that
      section -- the dead horse has been kicked past recognition.
      Ticket #4.

   *  In Appendix F.2, changed the requirement for server support to
      MAY, and prohibited client support, for source routing.  Also made
      a small wording change.  Per Interim.
      Ticket #17

   With this draft, comments in the running text ("//" at the beginning
   of lines in the plaintext version) that seem to no longer be relevant
   either generally or after the discussions during the 2022-01-21
   Interim are being removed.  The "Notes on Reading..." at the
   beginning of the document (just below the Abstract) have been revised
   accordingly.  Sections from which comments were removed this time
   include:

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 142]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   *  Abstract, comment introduced in -06 (No comments on it through -08
      are interpreted as consent;

   *  Section 2 (any discussion needed will be in A/S);

   *  Section 2.3.10 (discussion seems to have ended);

   *  Section 4.1.1.3 (no further discussion during Interim, so assume
      comment is no longer needed);

   *  Section 4.1.2 (no further discussion since -08 appeared or during
      Interim, assumed to not require further work);

   *  Section 4.5.3.1 (further discussion will be in A/S);

   *  Section 4.2.2 (this comment obsolete since revision -04 of this
      document).

   *  Cross-checked ticket notes and annotations in this document
      against the ticket system.  Consistent for closed tickets as of
      2022-01-31.

I.3.14.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-09 (2022-02-01 to
         -10

   *  Small editorial fixes, including a lingering typographical error
      or two.

   *  Captured some additional sections into the TOC.

   *  Added an additional index subsection for terminology, including
      the terms of Section 2.3 and a few others.  More entries may be
      needed.

   *  Modified Section 3.4.2 to flag continuing uncertainty about
      decisions in the January Interim and subsequent list discussion
      about some text in that Section.

   *  Modified Section 4.2.4.2 to correct confusing phrasing and make a
      placeholder for a possible addition raised on email 2022-03-05.

   *  Added Appendix H.25 and Appendix G.17 so all open (and most
      closed) applicable ticket numbers are identified in this document.

I.3.15.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-10 (2022-03-07) to
         -11

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 143]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   *  In order to improve tracking, removed all closed items for
      Appendix G to a new Appendix H, making this section/ appendix into
      Appendix I.  Stubs are retained in Appendix G so as to not mess up
      external references to the relevant numbers.  As part of the same
      process and to lower the odds of things falling through the
      cracks, a new "Ticket Index" has been added to permit accessing
      text in those appendices by ticket number.  As with those
      appendices G and H, this will disappear before the document
      becomes an RFC.

   *  Small editorial fixes, e.g., "this document" in the text referred
      to RFC 5321 and would not be accurate for the current draft and to
      clarify Section 3.3 slightly.  Also better identified closed items
      in Appendices G and H.1 and removed more now-obsolete CREF
      comments.

   *  Upgraded the "ASCII" reference and removed "US-ASCII" usage.
      Under the principle of minimum change, more citations of X.4-1968
      have been left intact with RFC 20 also cited where it seemed
      important and a pointer has been inserted from the former
      reference to the latter.

   *  Editorial improvement to the "end of mail data" discussion in
      Section 3.3 per a discussion that appeared on tool-discuss in July
      2021.  No substantive change, just making the requirement
      painfully obvious.

   *  Editorial improvements and additional examples in the discussion
      of local-part quoted strings in Section 4.1.2 as discussed in
      Appendix H.27 and Ticket #21.

   *  Modified Section 3.4.2 with edited version of text specified at
      IETF 113 to avoid confusion about header field changes when MAIL
      command parameter is changed.

   *  Addressed Ticket #3 about "sender-SMTP" versus "SMTP client" by
      adding a note indicating that they are equivalent (per IETF 113
      and Alexey's follow-up message 2022-05-5).

   *  Addressed the VRFY issues per mailing list discussions.  Ticket
      #63 [should be] closed.

   *  The portion of Section 1.2 that discussed submission had gotten a
      bit hard to follow.  It has been cleaned up a bit.  I strongly
      recommend checking it and making suggestions if it is not to your
      taste.  The CREF comment that was there before has been removed.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 144]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

I.3.16.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-11 (2022-05-24) to
         -12

   *  Usual small editorial corrections, including fixing several places
      where "^nbsp;" appeared in -11.

   *  Adjusted acknowledgments to pick up Ned Freed.

   *  Corrected the requirements terminology paragraph to include RFC
      8174.

   *  Updated Section 3.3 and Section 5.1 to remove the "restricted
      capability" handwaving, identify forwarders as an example of where
      MX processing might not be needed, and create cross-references
      between the two sections (Ticket #60).

   *  Added some additional cross-references, including in Section 7.2.

   *  Updated Appendices G and H to reflect tracker actions that affect
      this version of the draft.

   *  Per discussion at IETF 114 and in draft-klensin-email-for-clause,
      problem text in Section 7.6 has been tentatively replaced with
      text Alexey suggested.

I.3.17.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-12 (2022-07-09) to
         -13

   This is a snapshot version of the evolving document, intended to
   allow the WG to see what things look like before, e.g., additional
   changes to clarify and specify IANA actions and the form and content
   of the various registries.

   *  Closed ticket #62 and adjusted information for several other
      tickets that were closed without notification to the mailing
      list).

   *  Adjusted registration requirements for SMTP Service Extensions by
      removing requirement text from Section 2.2.2 and adding
      Appendix H.34.  Also started cleaning up some related issues (see
      Appendix H.33.  The text in Section 8.1 will ultimately be changed
      to whatever is worked out with the WG and IANA.

   *  Started to work through changes consequent of the loosened IANA
      registration requirements for Service Extensions.

   *  Small editorial fixes, including correcting a section title and
      moving text incorrectly added to Appendix G to Appendix H.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 145]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

I.3.18.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-13 (2022-09-13) to
         -14

   *  Altered Appendix B to get "RFC 822" out of the title and align the
      text.  Also added Appendix H.38 to identify related issues and
      started to distinguish references to RFC 5832 (which should
      remain) from those that should point to 5322bis when it gets a
      number.  There may not be any of the former, but they all need
      checking.

   *  Extensively modified IANA Considerations (Section 8), completely
      rewrote Section 2.2.2, and made a small change to Section 2.2.1 to
      reflect WG preferences/ instructions, both generally and to better
      reflect the implications of the "just get it registered to avoid
      name conflicts" change.  Also addressed tickets #68, #69, #70,
      #71, and #72.

   *  Added Appendix H.37 about the procedures IANA is to follow about
      registries other than Service Extensions and Appendix H.40 about
      loose ends with trace and other extension fields.

   *  Reorganized Section 4.4 to separate timestamp, Return-path, and
      other information into separate subsections.  Text might still
      need more work.

I.3.19.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-14 (2022-10-23) to
         -15

   *  Small editorial fixes

   *  Updated Appendix G and Appendix H to close issues for which text
      was supplied in -14 or earlier and for which there have been no
      comments and to synchronize with Alexey's lists.

   *  Dropped several more CREF comments/questions.  Most of them have
      received on comments in over a year.

   *  Began work on structure of document for publication, including
      inserting a placeholder for the final Appendix I, now in
      Appendix I.4 and starting to rewrite the introduction to
      Section 1.2.

   *  Added a new terminology subsection, Section 2.3.12, to make the
      "session" versus "transaction" more prominent.  This should really
      be the first entry under "SMTP Terminology" but I am trying to
      preserve the 5321 section numbering, at least until we decide we
      are nearly finished.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 146]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   *  Several small changes to allow the use of reply code 450 to
      indicate that the server is temporarily not available when used
      outside a mail transaction.

I.3.20.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-15 (2022-11-06) to
         -16

   *  Usual small editorial corrections and changes.

   *  Modified Appendix H.37 to more explicitly describe the problem,
      adding notes as indicated there.

   *  Forked Section 8.1.1, temporarily inserting new text and retaining
      the older version.

   *  Small modification to Section 8.1.4 to correct a bad
      crossreference.

   *  Consistent with discussion at IETF 115, removed the suggested new
      registry for additional trace header fields.

   *  Updated the note and set up Appendix I.4 for new text starting in
      the next draft.

I.3.21.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-16 (2022-12-06) to
         -17

   *  Editorial patches.

   *  Per discussion at 2022-12-07 Interim and Alexey's note to the list
      on 2022-12-08 of Section 8.1.3, changed the registration procedure
      for "with" and "via" (both all in "Received:") to "RFC Required"
      (after a brief detour through "IETF Review").  Address literal tag
      registration procedure remains unchanged.

   *  During the Interim, there was a discussion about changing the
      registration procedure for Additional Registered Clauses
      (Section 8.1.4) from "Standards Action/IETF approved Experimental"
      to something else, like "IETF Review".  The conclusion from that
      discussion is that, while those at the meeting seemed to favor
      making that change (by a VOTE of 3-1), it should be taken to the
      mailing list.  That has not happened but the author has, in a rare
      moment of succumbing to consensus by exhaustion, made the change
      and added a note.  This can be undone if needed after/if the WG
      ever gets around to discussing it and reaching a conclusion.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 147]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   *  Per discussion during the Interim and on the mailing list, settled
      on the two-step model for Service Extensions registrations that
      was described as "Option 2" in Section 8.1.1 of 5321bis-16, got
      rid of "Option 1" and started reworking the surrounding text.

   *  Rewrote the introductory "Note on Reading..." (just below the
      Abstract) to more accurately reflect the state of reviews and
      document maturity.

   *  First version of the rewrite to Section 2.2.2 to adjust for the
      change to the two-option Service Registration model.

   *  Closed several Appendix G items that seem to be settled, most of
      them about IANA registries, to Appendix H.

I.3.22.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-17 (2022-12-31) to
         -18

   *  Corrected the change log in Appendix I.3.21 to identify the
      changes to Section 2.2.2, which was accidentally omitted.

   *  Corrected more typos (most introduced in -17).

   *  Usual minor editorial fixes, some related rearrangement of text
      within sections, and adjustments to the index.

   *  Added Appendix H.41 about exceptions to the spec that are
      considered reasonable and whether they are properly described.

   *  Further tuned the text in Section 8.1.1 to improve clarity.

   *  Added a temporary CREF note to the beginning of Section 4.4 to
      indicate that further changes may be needed depending on the WG's
      conclusions about documentation of trace information.

   *  Pushed back work on Appendix I.4 to the next revision.  At least.

I.3.23.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-18 (2023-02-07) to
         -19

   *  Editorial corrections

   *  More closed issue/ticket cleanups and consequent moves from
      Appendix G to Appendix H.  Note removed from end of Section 8.1.4.

   *  Recorded ticket information for Appendix H.41.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 148]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   *  Removed several comments that called out changes in -17 or earlier
      and for which there has been no response or further discussion.  I
      have not removed the comments from Appendix I.1 and a few other
      places, and have not removed ones that seem current.

   *  Made the "trace" field-related changes as discussed on the mailing
      list.  See specifically
      https://mailarchive.ietf.org/arch/msg/emailcore/
      ITYEtb_OhE_IfijfRfbqCNL_QDM and
      https://mailarchive.ietf.org/arch/msg/emailcore/
      H6Zqwm0KErXpINc6SqjL4FsotdU this version of the present document
      is intended to parallel draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5322bis-06 as
      discussed in those notes.

I.3.24.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-19 (2023-07-23) to
         -20

   *  Corrected a few typographical or presentation errors including a
      missing word.

   *  Restored Section 4.4.2, which had been accidentally dropped in
      -10.

   *  Inserted a note in Section 8.1.1 to reflect the possibility of
      removing the "two models" discussion and, instead, referencing
      draft-klensin-iana-consid-hybrid or a RFC8126bis that incorporates
      that policy.

I.3.25.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-20 (2023-11-16) to
         -21

   *  Fixed more minor typographical errors (one so far).

   *  Divided Section 8.1.1 into two subsections and tuned text
      slightly.  That should make it a bit easier to follow and, if IANA
      wants the document to specify exactly how the registry is laid
      out, would make that requirement easier to satisfy.

   *  Modified Section 8.1.1.2, Paragraph 2, Item 8 to incorporate RFC
      6409 Table 1 values in the SMTP Extensions Registry.

   *  Added index entries for message submission.

   *  Small adjustments to the introductory material (xref
      target="HistoryContext"/>) to reflect the IANA Considerations
      restructuring.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 149]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

I.3.26.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-21 (2023-11-27) to
         -22

   *  Edited Appendix B including new introductory text, removing a
      header-checking requirement that has been inappropriate (even in
      RFC 2821) given changes to the IMF spec, and minor editorial
      tweaks.

   *  Modified Section 7.9 to use new text suggested in response to
      Ticket #82 with no comments received after that.

   *  Additional <cref> comments that no longer seem useful have been
      dropped.

   *  Miscellaneous other small changes including an update to the
      Acknowledgments.

I.3.27.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-22 (2023-12-05) to
         -23

   *  Corrected use of 556 code in Section 4.2.4.2

   *  Moved more references to RFC 5322 to point to rfc5322bis.

   *  Added additional index entries for limits (such as lengths) and
      timeouts.

   *  Moved another item from Appendix G to Appendix H.  Appending G is
      now empty substantively (i.e., no un-closed items).

   *  Modified the list of updates for rfc5321bis-22 above to
      incorporate one that was missed.

   *  Tweaked the Abstract to make the nits checker happier.

I.3.28.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-23 (2023-12-10) to
         -24

   *  Corrected many small editorial errors and poorly-written
      statements, especially those identified by Tim Wicinski.

   *  Found and fixed more "nbsp" problems.

I.3.29.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-24 (2024-01-11) to
         -25

   *  As usual, small editorial errors that have been noticed have been
      corrected.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 150]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   *  The discrepancy between the RFC 1035 preferred syntax and
      practices today (and since circa late 1986) has been flagged, with
      text and references adjusted.

   *  The proposed final change summary (currently Appendix I.4) has
      been folded in after correcting numerous small errors.
      Substantially identical text was posted to the EMAILCORE list on
      2024-01-15 and no comments have been received.  While suggestions
      will still be welcomed, the bar for signification changes rises
      and time grows short.

   *  Because no one has identified a case where it is still needed, the
      reference to RFC5322 (as distinct from 5322bis) has been dropped.

   *  Added a sentence to Section 4.2 to clarify that the PIPELINING
      extension does not change the principle that each command
      generates exactly one reply.

I.3.30.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-25 (2024-01-24) to
         -26

   *  Many small errors and glitches caught and fixed.  Many thanks to
      John Levine, Alexey Melnikov, and Rob Sayre for the careful
      reading and aggressive and constructive nit-picking.

   *  Several small modifications to Section 1.2 to make the
      relationship to other work more clear.

   *  More adjustments to "ASCII" versus "US-ASCII".

   *  Corrected the descriptions of code 553 in Section 4.2.2 and
      Section 4.2.3 to include the VRFY case.

   *  Notes added to Section 4.2 and Section 4.2.4.3 about "SHOULD"
      versus "should" choices.  WG feedback needed.

   *  Added a note for WG consideration and decision to Section 5 about
      multihoming and load balancing.  The WG needs to decide what to do
      there.  See the note for more information.

I.3.31.  Changes from draft-ietf-emailcore-rfc5321bis-26 (2024-02-09) to
         -27

   *  More small editorial improvements.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 151]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   *  Reopened Appendices G and H to record new tickets, tentatively
      resolved ticket #88, and, in some cases, added proposed text to
      address others.  Note that "proposed" in the context is the
      editor's best effort to summarize referenced list discussion prior
      to posting of this version, not a statement of preferences.

   *  These changes are not believed to affect Appendix I.4.

I.4.  Summary of changes from RFC 5321 (published in October 2008) to
      <<This Document>>

   As discussed in Section 1.2, this specification combines material
   from several earlier ones.  The most numerous changes from RFC 5321
   have been editorial in nature.  Those changes have included
   correcting long-standing errors, improving terminology and its
   consistent use, updating references to documents that have been
   replaced, adding additional cross-references within the document, and
   reorganizing material to make it easier to follow.  In general, those
   changes are not called out in the list below.  The order of changes
   in the list below is not significant.

   // EMAILCORE WG participants: I've made choices below about
   // references to particular sections when those seemed appropriate
   // and omitted others when that did not appear to add much value.  If
   // you disagree, speak up.  Soon.

   // RFC Editor: The list that follows was numbered in order to make
   // review discussion convenient.  Unless you prefer it, I'd rather
   // have a bullet list in the final version to reinforce the "order
   // not significant" message.

   1.  All of the outstanding errata [65] filed against RFC 5321 have
       been addressed.  That list does include some editorial issues.

   2.  The discussion of SMTP Service Extensions and how they are
       registered with IANA has been extensively revised and a new
       registration model defined.  The reasons for this are discussed
       in Section 2.2.2.

   3.  Corrected, updated, or clarified a few ABNF syntax errors.

   4.  Improved the descriptions of the applicability of several reply
       codes.  Also included descriptions of codes added since RFC 5321
       was published.

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 152]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

   5.  An index was added to make it easier for readers to find specific
       terminology, ABNF productions, command arguments, and so on.
       Several additional cross-references have been added for the same
       reasons.

   6.  Clarified the relationship between mail transactions, repeated
       uses of EHLO within an SMTP session, and command arguments and
       responses between transactions.

   7.  Improved the discussion of the distinction of Message Submission
       Agents (MSAs), particularly those described in RFC 6409 [48], and
       Mail Transfer Agents (MTAs) as exemplified by this specification.
       This document does not alter RFC 6409 in any way.

   8.  The discussion of "trace information" has been reworked to make
       it more clear and more consistent with the discussion in the
       Message Format specification [16].  While the textual changes are
       extensive, it is not believed that any of them make substantive
       changes to the SMTP definition.

Index

   A C M S T

      A

         Argument Syntax
            ALPHA  Section 4.1.2, Paragraph 2, Item 1
            Additional-Registered-Clauses  Section 4.4.5, Paragraph
               3.26.1
            Addtl-Link  Section 4.4.5
            Addtl-Protocol  Section 4.4.5
            Argument  Section 4.1.2
            Atom  Section 4.1.2
            By-domain  Section 4.4.5, Paragraph 3.10.1
            Domain  Section 4.1.2
            Dot-string  Section 4.1.2
            Extended-Domain  Section 4.4.5
            For  Section 4.4.5
            Forward-Path  Section 4.1.2
            From-domain  Section 4.4.5, Paragraph 3.8.1
            General-address-literal  Section 4.1.3
            Greeting  Section 4.2
            ID  Section 4.4.5
            IPv4-address-literal  Section 4.1.3
            IPv6-addr  Section 4.1.3
            IPv6-address-literal  Section 4.1.3
            Keyword  Section 4.1.2

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 153]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

            Ldh-str  Section 4.1.2
            Let-dig  Section 4.1.2
            Link  Section 4.4.5
            Local-part  Section 4.1.2
            Mail-parameters  Section 4.1.2
            Mailbox  Section 4.1.2
            Opt-info  Section 4.4.5
            Path  Section 4.1.2
            Protocol  Section 4.4.5
            QcontentSMTP  Section 4.1.2
            Quoted-string  Section 4.1.2
            Rcpt-parameters  Section 4.1.2
            Reply-code  Section 4.2
            Reply-line  Section 4.2
            Return-path-line  Section 4.4.5, Paragraph 3.2.1
            Reverse-Path  Section 4.1.2
            Snum  Section 4.1.3
            Stamp  Section 4.4.5, Paragraph 3.6.1
            Standardized-tag  Section 4.1.3
            String  Section 4.1.2
            TCP-info  Section 4.4.5
            Time-stamp-line  Section 4.4.5, Paragraph 3.4.1
            Via  Section 4.4.5
            With  Section 4.4.5
            address-literal  Section 4.1.2
            atext  Section 4.1.2, Paragraph 2, Item 2
            dcontent  Section 4.1.3
            esmtp-keyword  Section 4.1.2
            esmtp-param  Section 4.1.2
            esmtp-value  Section 4.1.2
            h16  Section 4.1.3
            ls32  Section 4.1.3
            qtextSMTP  Section 4.1.2
            quoted-pairSMTP  Section 4.1.2
            sub-domain  Section 4.1.2
            textstring  Section 4.2

      C

         Commands and Syntax
            data  Section 4.1.1.4, Paragraph 8, Item 1
            ehlo  Section 3.2, Paragraph 1; Section 4.1.1.1, Paragraph 1
            expn  Section 4.1.1.7, Paragraph 4, Item 1
            help  Section 4.1.1.8, Paragraph 5, Item 1
            mail  Section 4.1.1.2
            noop  Section 4.1.1.9, Paragraph 4, Item 1
            quit  Section 4.1.1.10, Paragraph 5, Item 1
            rcpt  Section 4.1.1.3, Paragraph 15

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 154]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

            rset  Section 4.1.1.5, Paragraph 4, Item 1
            send, saml, soml  Appendix F.6; Appendix H.15, Paragraph 1
            vrfy  Section 4.1.1.6, Paragraph 4, Item 1

      M

         Message Submission
            As relays  Section 3.6.2
            Correcting messages  Section 6.4, Paragraph 4
            Domain names  Section 2.3.5, Paragraph 2
            Pointer to RFC 6409  Section 1.2, Paragraph 5; Section 2.1,
               Paragraph 4
            Reply codes  Section 4.2.4.2, Paragraph 2
            SMTP Extension Registration  Section 8.1.1.2, Paragraph 2,
               Item 8
            With generated commands  Appendix B

      S

         Sizes, Lengths, and Timeouts  *_Section 4.5.3_*
            Command Line length  Section 4.5.3.1.4
            DATA Termination Timeout  Section 4.5.3.2.6
            Data Block/ TCP Wait Timeout  Section 4.5.3.2.5
            Data Initialion Timeout Timeout  Section 4.5.3.2.4
            Domain name or number length  Section 4.5.3.1.2
            Exceeding Limits  Section 4.5.3.1.9
            Local part length  Section 4.5.3.1.1
            Mail Command Timeout  Section 4.5.3.2.2
            Message Content Size  Section 4.5.3.1.7
            Minimum Number of Recipients  Section 4.5.3.1.8
            Path lengths  Section 4.5.3.1.3
            RCPT Command Timeout  Section 4.5.3.2.3
            Reply Line length  Section 4.5.3.1.5
            Server Wait Timeout  Section 4.5.3.2.7
            Text Line length  Section 4.5.3.1.6
         Source Routes  *_Appendix F.2_*
            A-d-l  Appendix F.2
            At-domain  Appendix F.2
            Path  Appendix F.2

      T

         Terminology
            Address  Section 2.3.11, Paragraph 1
            Buffer  Section 2.3.6, Paragraph 1
            Commands and Replies  Section 2.3.7, Paragraph 1
            Domain Names  Section 2.3.5, Paragraph 1
            Gateway  Section 2.3.10, Paragraph 2

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 155]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

            Host  Section 2.3.4, Paragraph 1
            Lines  Section 2.3.8, Paragraph 1
            Mail Agent  Section 2.3.3, Paragraph 1
            Mail object  Section 2.3.1, Paragraph 1
            Message Content  Section 2.3.9, Paragraph 1
            Originator  Section 2.3.10, Paragraph 1
            Senders and Receivers  Section 2.3.2, Paragraph 1
            address RR  Section 2.3.5, Paragraph 3
            primary host name  Section 2.3.5, Paragraph 4, Item 1
         Ticket Index
            1  Appendix H.1, Paragraph 1
            10  Appendix H.32, Paragraph 3
            11  Appendix G.7.16, Paragraph 1; Appendix H.5, Paragraph 1
            12  Appendix H.36, Paragraph 1
            13  Appendix H.10, Paragraph 2
            14  Appendix H.11, Paragraph 1
            15  Appendix H.26, Paragraph 1
            16  Appendix H.14, Paragraph 1
            17  Appendix H.12, Paragraph 1
            18  Appendix H.13, Paragraph 1
            19  Appendix H.9, Paragraph 1
            2  Appendix H.2, Paragraph 2
            20  Appendix H.15, Paragraph 1
            21  Appendix H.27, Paragraph 4
            22  Appendix I.1
            23  Appendix I.1
            24  Appendix I.1
            25  Appendix I.1
            26  Appendix I.1
            27  Appendix I.1
            28  Appendix I.1
            29  Appendix I.1
            3  Appendix H.3, Paragraph 1
            30  Appendix H.4, Paragraph 1; Appendix I.1
            40  Appendix G.8, Paragraph 1; Appendix H.19, Paragraph 2
            42  Appendix H.21, Paragraph 1
            43  Appendix H.20, Paragraph 1; Appendix H.22, Paragraph 2
            48  Appendix H.23, Paragraph 1
            5  Appendix H.6, Paragraph 1
            50  Appendix H.18, Paragraph 1
            52  Appendix H.16, Paragraph 1
            53  Appendix H.17, Paragraph 1; Appendix H.28, Paragraph 2
            55  Appendix H.39, Paragraph 5
            56  Appendix H.34, Paragraph 2
            58  Appendix H.24, Paragraph 1.1.1
            59  Appendix H.24, Paragraph 1.2.1
            6  Appendix H.8, Paragraph 1
            60  Appendix H.24, Paragraph 1.3.1

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 156]
Internet-Draft                    SMTP                     February 2024

            61  Appendix H.24, Paragraph 1.4.1
            62  Appendix G.17, Paragraph 3.5.1; Appendix H.24, Paragraph
               1.5.1
            63  Appendix G.17, Paragraph 3.6.1
            64  Appendix H.25, Paragraph 1
            67  Appendix H.33, Paragraph 3
            68  Appendix H.35, Paragraph 2
            7  Appendix I.1
            75  Appendix H.38, Paragraph 2
            81  Appendix H.40, Paragraph 1
            82  Appendix H.41, Paragraph 2; Appendix H.42, Paragraph 2
            89  Appendix G.26, Paragraph 2
            9  Appendix H.7, Paragraph 1
            90  Appendix G.27, Paragraph 2
            91  Appendix G.28, Paragraph 2

Author's Address

   John C. Klensin
   1770 Massachusetts Ave, Suite 322
   Cambridge, MA 02140
   United States of America
   Email: john-ietf@jck.com

Klensin                  Expires 29 August 2024               [Page 157]